Home

User Manual

Contents

1. Table 12 RS232 DTE Port Specification 221 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide V 35 Interface Specifications DESIGNATION PIN Signal Gound B Clear to Send D Receive Line Signal Detect Received Data Received Data Receive Timing Receive Timing x adm OS o e o o ee o o eo e oO oT e e SIGNAL DESIGNATION T z A Chassis Ground c Request to Send E Data Set Ready Transmitted D ata Transmitted D ata U Terminal Timing WwW Terminal Timing d Transmit Timing AA Transmit Timing Cable p n 091 3200 Name V 35 db25 vers Connector 1 db25 Male Connector 2 34 pin M block male Length 3 feet 2 P TxD A lt twisted 14 S TxD B lt pair 3 R RxD A lt twisted 16 T RxD B lt pair 17 RxCk lt twisted 9 X RxCk B pair 15 Y TxCk A lt twisted 12 AA TxCk B lt pair 24 U ExtCk A lt twisted 11 ExtCk lt pair 6 E DSR 20 H DTR 4 Cc RTS 5 D CTS 8 F RLSD 18 K LT 7 B SG nc A FG 222 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide 48V Interface Specifications 48 FRM RET GND 48V 48 Voltage FRM GND Frame Ground RET Return Table 13 48 Power Connector Alarm Relay Contact 1 12 24 Closed Alarm Pin 1 2 Pin 1 Pin1 of one side
2. User s Guide T1 Channels Full Slave Unit config Host Contact TestSlave Host Location Remote TestLab2 IP Default 000 000 000 000 Telnet On User Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 52 24 IP Default 000 000 000 000 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 000 000 000 000 ZLAN 2 is not used on this unit so it needs no IP Address IP Default 000 000 000 000 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability Off Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Interface S2 Type T1 59 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal
3. Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Packets Arriving Too Late The packet arrived with a sequence number that had already been trans mitted on the serial port The IP network delayed the packet too late for transmission This is a data error Interconnect network is not processing packets in a timely manner and or bandwidth is saturated This may be due to insufficient Tube Buffers Increase Buffers to try to resolve the problem For testing purposes turn Tube Buffers to 80 and Tube FPP to 56 or the maximum allowed for the unit Use this only as a testing configuration Most equipment can t handle more than 100ms of round trip delay With these settings there will be FPP 8 Buffers b6FPP 8 80 560ms of one way delay With the above setting there will be over 1 second of delay round trip This test will tell you if the interconnect network can handle the IP Tube traffic Clear All statistics and view error counts Also switching to Frac tional will reduce the bandwidth This can also be useful for testing the interconnection Packets Not Arriving A packet for a given sequence number never arrived This is a data er ror Interconnect network is not processing packets in a timely manner dropping packets and or bandwidth is saturated Gaps in sequence due to Packets Arriving Too Late or Packets Not Arriv ing are filled with data from the next arriving packet It
4. Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA hash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in 234 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
5. IP Tube sh lan1 info Interface LAN1 Port Type Twisted Pair Protocol Type Ethernet Speed in Mbps 100 Duplex Mode Full Port State Up Connection State Connected IP State RUNNING DDNS Status Off Free Buffer Count 288 LAN Info Data Description Speed in Mbps This will report the actual data speed that the Ethernet interface is com municating at regardless of the configuration If the LAN interface is manually configured for 100Mbps and is reporting 10Mbps then the port is running at 10Mbps not 100Mbps If the interface is not reporting the correct data check the network equip ment it is connected to and make sure it is operating correctly Duplex Mode Reports current Duplex mode If the interface is not reporting the correct data check the network equip ment it is connected to and make sure it is operating correctly 205 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Here is a sample of the Show Information command for the TEL interface Important information points are discussed below IP Tube sh s1 info Interface S1 Port Type E1 Line Interface 1200hm Protocol Type IPTube Port State Up Connection State Connected Free Buffer Count 101 TEL Info Data Description Connection State Informs if the proper T1 or E1 framing is present It will report Not Con nected if it does not see the correct framing it is expecting For T1 Framing ESF or D4
6. Host Name IPTube E1 Master Clock IP Default router 192 168 1 4 Interface E1 IP Address of this IP Tube IP Address 192 168 1 1 24 Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Framing Transparent IP Address of remote IP Tube Tube Address 192 168 1 2 Tube UDPPort 3175 Tube TOS 08 Hex Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Compression Off Tube Destination Ethernet Address Resolution Tube Ethernet ARP On Tube Ethernet Address E1 Data Normal E1 Transmit timing set to Internal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter 0x7F START CHANNEL NUMBER OF CHANNELS E1 Channels Fractional 1 8 Example 6 E1 Compression 32 0505 with 40 to 1 Compression Scenario This sample configuration details an IP Tube interconnect of a Full E1 with compression enabled Note E1 compression does not need to be without framing bits DSO 1 through 32 are transported This IP Tube is set to internal timing as the master clock of the IP Tube s T1 connection The remote IP Tube must be set to use its Phase Lock Loop to match this frequency Note the remote IP Tube is across a WAN whose IP address range is 192 168 2 x The WAN router address is 192 168 1 4 this is the address for the Default Router Command Line Listing Host Name IP Tube T1 Compression Master Clock IP Default router 192 168 1 4 Interface E1 IP Address of this IP Address 192 168 1 1 24 Etherne
7. T1 IdleCharacter value T1 Channels Full Fractional Starting DSO Number of DSOs Note When more then one group of non contigous channels is needed hyphens and commas can be used to list all group or individual channels Note T1 Clocking GPS OCXO and GPSBackupOCXO is only available for the IP Tube G4 as an upgradable options at time of purchase Example T1 Channels Fractional 1 4 8 12 16 8 This configuration of the usage of a fractional T1 will enable channels 1 2 3 and 4 8 9 10 11 and 12 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 and 24 8 Chapter 2 Installation QuickStart Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide E1 Configuration Parameters The IP Tube E1 serial interface number 1 S1 is configured for E1 operation by the manufacturer The following E1 parameters must match the configuration of the E1 interface to which it is connect ed The E1 clock setting is dependent upon the source of the E1 Clock Interface S1 Type E1 E1 Data Normal Invert E1 Clocking Internal Network V2PLL PLL GPS OCXO GPSBackupOCXO E1 Framing CRC4 FAS UNFRAMED E1 Coding HDB3 AMI E1 IdleCharacter value E1 Channels Full Fractional Starting DSO Number of DSOs Note When more then one group or individual non contigous channels are needed hyphens and commas can be used to list all groups and individual channels Note E1 Clocking GPS OCXO and GPSBackupOCXO is only available for the IP Tube G4 as up
8. ROBBEDBIT Sets the T1 signaling mode when echo cancellation is on ROBBEDBIT selects robbed bit signaling mode only necessary when echo cancellation is on and the T1 is transporting robbed bits This would require Tube Framing set for Multiframe as well E amp M or Channel Bank circuits would require Tube Framing Multiframe and T1 Signaling Robbedbit to allow proper transport of the T1 while using Echo Cancellation NONE selects no special signaling mode for T1 Enables or disables echo cancellation E amp M Channel Bank and Robbedbit Configuration Example for T1 Echo Cancellation This is an example configuration for running TUBE FRAMING MULTIFRAMED and T1 ECHOCHAN CELLER ON for E amp M Channel Bank and Robbedbit transport Master Unit Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Multiframe Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 13 Tube FPP 24 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube Compression SilenceDetect Off 151 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking PLL T1 LBO CSU OdB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7F T1 Channels Full T1 EchoCanceller On T1 Signaling RobbedBit T1 Off choChannels None Slave Unit Interface S1 Type T1
9. T1 IP Tube Unit B config interface Host Name IPTube B Host Location Site B Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 51 24 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates O Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f 40 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide T1 TxUnderrunAIS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 1 T1 port Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 2 T1 ports Interface S3 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tu
10. TUBE FPP value Frames Per Packet specifies the number of frames received on the RS 530 or V 35 interface to be encapsulated in a single IP UDP packet The size of the serial interface frame depends on the interface provided in the IP Tube For the RS 530 and V 35 interfaces the frame size is 512 bits 64 bytes Proper configuration of FPP is appplication dependent The SENSEDTRDSR command is used to configure the RS530 RS232 and V 35 models for connec tion to their respective communication equipment IP Tube DTR DSR Sensitivity AVAILABLE ONLY ON REV LEVEL 20 85 28 MODELS The SENSEDTRDSR command determines whether the the IP Tube is sensitive to the DTR signal in the case of IP Tube DCE or the DSR signal in the case of IP Tube DTE When SENSEDTRDSR is ON the IP Tube will send IP packets with encapsulated data only when the DTR IP Tube DCE or DSR IP Tube DTE signal is asserted When SENSEDTRDSR is OFF the IP Tube ignores the DTR or DSR signal and sends IP packets with encapsulated data SENSEDTRDSR ON OFF Enable or Disable DTR Sensitivity on a Serial Port for DCE Enable or Disable DSR Sensitivity on a Serial Port for IP Tube DTE DCEDTEMODE DCE DTE DCE sets the RS530 serial interface to operate as a Data Communication Equipment that provides the Transmit and Receive clocking DTE sets the RS530 serial interface to operate as a Data Terminal Equipment that receives the Transmit and Receive cl
11. Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 32 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 32 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 1024 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S3 Type RS 530 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off 103 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 32 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 32 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 51 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3277 Tube 2 TOS 0xB8 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 1024 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S4 Type RS 530 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 32 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 32 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tu
12. Assured Delivery Protocol PROTOCOL ADPIPTUBE Three control settings for the ADPIPTube protocol that determine the retransmit algorithm are as fol lows e Protocol ADPIfPTube LimitRetransmit NN e Protocol ADPIPTube DelayRetransmit NN e Protocol ADPIPTube CountRetransmit NN The LimitRetransmit parameter determines the maximum number of packets ADP will retransmit after it has sent a Tube packet DelayRetransmit determines how long ADP should wait in terms of packets before retransmitting CountRetransmit determines how often a packet should be retrans mitted See a detailed discussion of Assured Delivery Protocol in Chapter 3 nstallation PROTOCOL ADPIPTUBE DELAYRETRANSMIT NN Specify NN for the delay before the ADPIPTUBE protocol retransmits an unacknowledged packet The delay is specified in terms of Tube packets PROTOCOL ADPIPTUBE LIMITRETRANSMIT NN Specify NN for the maximum number of unacknowledged packets the ADPIPTUBE protocol retrans mits after transmitting a Tube packet PROTOCOL ADPIPTUBE COUNTRETRANSMIT NN NN specifies the minimum interval expressed in terms of Tube packets before a retransmitted packet is retransmitted again ADPIPTUBE Protocol Assured Delivery Protocol offers reliable delivery of IP Tube packets in an unreliable network environment ADP can re sequence packets delivered out of order and detect and retransmit missing packets ADP achieves it s purpose by including acknowledgements of received
13. DHCP Client amp Dynamic Addressing amp Dynamic DNS 133 Tube Configuration 135 TUBE PROTOCOL Commands 135 Assured Delivery Protocol 135 557 Protocol 136 TUBE LOOPBACK Commands 136 TUBE CONFIRMREMOTEALIVE Command 136 TUBE LANPORT Commands 137 TUBE LANPORT Protector 137 Enhanced Protector Commands 138 TUBE LANPORT Alternator Configuration 139 TUBE LANPORT AltProtector Configuration 139 TUBE PACKET Configuration 140 Tube SCADA Configuration 142 Tube Quality of Service 143 Tube Compression 144 T1 E1 Multiplex Option 145 T1 Interface 147 E amp M Channel Bank and Robbedbit Configuration Example for T1 Echo Cancellation 151 E1 Interface 153 E1 Echo Canceller 155 RS530 RS232 X 21 amp V 35 Interface 156 SER RS530 RS232 and V 35 Specific Configurations 159 Switch Commands 161 Link Protector Commands 162 Link Protector Alarm Relay Commands 162 Rate Limiter 163 Table of Contents Engage Communication User s Guide SS7 SIGTRAN SNIFFER ETHERREAL Configuration 163 Chapter 6 165 IP Tube DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 UNO G4 Configuration amp Operation 165 IP Tube Installation Steps 166 System and Ethernet Parameters 166 T1 Parameters 166 T1 DSU CSU Parameters 167 E1 Parameters 167 E1 DSU CSU Parameters 167 T1 E1 Clocking Considerations 167 Rate Limiter 168 TOS QoS and UDP Port Number 168 Latency and Bandwidth Considerations 169 IP Packet Encapsulation Overhead 169 IP Tube Compression 170 IP Tube Cabling 170 Alarm Relay Contact
14. IP Default 000 000 000 000 default router is set at the system level Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 52 24 IP Default 000 000 000 000 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol adp Protocol adp delay 5 Protocol adp limit 2 Protocol adp count 1 72 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7F T1 Channels Full Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol ADP Protocol adp delay 5 Protocol adp limit 2 Protocol adp count 1 Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Multi Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7F T1 Channels Full Example 6 GT1 Dual LAN Ports Four Active Serial Ports Scenario e with 2 LAN ports and 4 Serial por
15. Interface S3 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination Tube 1 UDPPORT Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression 192 168 1 51 3177 Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS 29 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide T1 IdleCharacter OxTf T1 TxUnderrunAIS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 3 T1 ports Interface S4 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates O Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 T1 ports T1 IP Tube Generic Example A Unit B config interface Host Name IPTube B Host Location Site B Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 51 24 Port Off 30 Chapter 4 Configuration
16. Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Multiframe Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 13 Tube FPP 24 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube Compression SilenceDetect Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU OdB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7F T1 Channels Full T1 EchoCanceller On T1 Signaling RobbedBit T1 Off choChannels None 152 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide E1 Interface The IP Tube is available with an E1 interface providing connection speeds up to 2 048 Mbps The fol lowing Serial Interface commands are applicable to IP Tube models connecting to E1 interfaces The serial interface commands include those for the E1 DSU CSU parameters TYPE The TYPE parameter is factory configured to match the Serial port s hardware and should be set to E1 TUBE FRAMING E1FRAMED TRANSPARENT Determines whether the E1 framing byte is encapsulated in the IP UDP packet along with the DSO data E1Framed Encapsulates the framing byte along with the DSO data Using a Loopback plug with E1Framed is not a valid test configuration Transparent Only the data in the selected DSO s is transported in the IP Tube The E1 framing byte is not encap sulated Note The s
17. T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery On T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Slave Unit config Host Contact Test Tube Host Location Test Lab IP Default 000 000 000 000 Telnet On User Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 2 53 24 IP Def 192 168 2 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 2 54 24 IP Def 192 168 2 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On 76 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability Off Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Interface S2
18. These concepts are central to an understanding of IP Tube functionality Several of the most common terms and concepts are covered in the Glossary section 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Installation QuickStart This QuickStart Chapter is intended for users who understand how they want their IP Tube installed and configured and only require the mechanics of performing the installation It includes the basic configuration of the units and has some detail on the more complex clocking aspects of the RS530 RS232 and V35 models Refer to Chapter 4 Configuration Examples for cut and paste configuration Communication with the IP Tube Console Port Telnet Initial communication with the IP Tube is made through the Console port utilizing the Command Line interface detailed in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Communication to the Console port should be set as 9600 baud 1 stop bit no parity 8 bit data flow control none The Console port on the IP Tube utilizes an RJ45 jack The Console port is configured as DTE port An RJ45 DB9 adapter is provided with the IP Tube which permits a direct connection to DCE equip ment such as a COM connection of a PC Once a serial connection between a workstation and the IP Tube Console port is established and a carriage return CR is entered a Login prompt will appear The default login is root No password is needed until it is set by the user with the command Passwd Once an I
19. packets on its Ethernet interface and transmission out is Port 1 interface can be checked Repeatedly issuing the command SHOW STATISTICS short hand SH ST can help determine the source of a problem For example errors with the Ethernet interface reception of packets will slow or stop the Port interface transmission of packets Errors with Port interface reception of packets will slow or stop the expected rate of the Ethernet interface transmission of packets Certain statistics can indicate clocking problems Port interface Transmit underruns UN indicate the interface ran out of packets to transmit If the Ethernet interface is running without errors then this might indicate the transmit clock on this tube is running faster than the remote tube is clocking recep tion of data on its port interface Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Transmit DrainDrops indicate the number of packets dropped by the IP Tube after Ethernet interface reception because too many buffers are queued on the port interface The number of buffers queued are indicated by Transmit Buffer Queue Depth If Transmit Buffer Queue Depth is increasing beyond the configured Tube Buffers and Transmit Drain Drops are occurring then this would indicate the IP Tube s transmit clock is running slower than the remote tube is clocking reception of data on its port interface In either case of port interface Transmit UN errors or Transm
20. 000 000 000 000 No default IP address is needed unless the two units are on different subnets Port On BroadcastRcv On 57 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 51 IP Default 000 000 000 000 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability Off Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet ARP On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Will get timing from the T1 connected to this unit making this unit the Master Clocking unit Interface S2 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter 0x7f T1 Channels Full Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f 58 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication
21. 1 cable DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 models only RJ45 to DB15 male adapter for 120 ohm balanced GE1 DLE1 only e Power Converter 110 or 220 Vac input 24 Vac or 24 Vdc output Documentation CD with Tube User s Guide Installing the Hardware Locating the IP Tube Site consideration is important for proper operation of the IP Tube The user should install the unit in an environment providing Avwell ventilated indoor location Access within six feet of a power outlet Two feet additional clearance around the unit to permit easy cabling connection The IP Tube can be mounted on a standard 19 inch equipment rack available from Engage Powering the IP Tube Engage IP Tube units utilize an external power adapter available in 110 VAC and 220 VAC versions providing AC output 12 Engage Communication User s Guide The appropriate power adapter is provided with each unit Ensure the power adapter is not connected to power before plugging the AC adapter into the rear panel power connector Connect the power adapter to an appropriate AC power outlet and check the power led on the front panel of the Engage IP Tube The power led will be a steady green when the internal diagnostics have completed Console Port All IP Tube models include a Console port for configuration The Console port may be used for serial communication from a local workstation IPe Tube models utilize an RJ45 jack for the Console port Th
22. 168 2 50 Spanning Off RateLimit 3 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 2 53 24 IP Def 000 000 000 000 Port On BroadcastRcv On 81 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 2 54 24 IP Def 000 000 000 000 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol ADPIPTube Protocol ADPIPTube DelayRetransmit 5 Protocol ADPIPTube LimitRetransmit 2 Protocol ADPIPTube CountRetransmit 1 Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 2 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 2 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability Off Tube Compression Off Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol ADPIPTube Protocol ADPIPTube DelayRetransmit 5 Protocol ADPIPTube LimitRetransmit 2 Protocol ADPIPTube CountRetransmit 1 Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 2 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery
23. 170 Chapter 7 171 RS530DL RS530HS RS232 X 21 V 35 and IP Tube SER RS530 RS232 V 35 Configura tion amp Operation 171 IP Tube Installation Steps 171 System and Ethernet Parameters 171 Serial Interface Parameters 171 TOS QoS and UDP Port Number 172 Clocking and Bandwidth IP Tube RS530DL RS530HS RS232 X 21 V 35 173 Table 1 Interval vs Serial Interface Data Rate with SCTCLOCK set to 1 544Mbps 176 Table 2 Transmit Rate vs Interval and Percentage 177 Table 3 Overhead resulting from various FPP configurations 179 Data Rates 180 RS530 Notes for X 21 Operation 181 Table 4 Custom Cable Pin Out for X 21 operation 181 SER RS530 RS232 V 35 Specific Configurations 182 SER RS232 Asynchronous Specific Configurations 183 SER PIO Port Specific Operation 184 RS Control Signal Extension 184 Debug 184 Chapter 8 185 IP Tube SER RS530 AutoProtect 185 Theory of Operation 185 System and Ethernet Parameters 185 AutoProtect Feature Settings 185 AutoProtect Signaling Port Settings 186 Table of Contents Engage Communication User s Guide Chapter 9 187 IP Tube T3 Configuration amp Operation 187 IP Tube Installation Steps 187 System and Ethernet Parameters 187 T3 Parameters 187 T3 Clocking Considerations 187 Latency and Bandwidth Considerations 188 IP Packet Encapsulation Overhead 188 IP Tube Cabling 188 T3 Status LEDs 189 T3 EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION Firmware 64 72 xx 190 Legacy IP Tube T3 C
24. 25 percent For example the 5096 setting blocks every other pulse thus re ducing the SCT clock The use of the percentage setting to achieve a specific data rate is minimized with the SCxCLOCK MODE FACTOR settings that provide for a high resolution base clock frequency configurations Interval Percentage Table 2 Transmit Rate vs Interval and Percentage 177 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide An interval consists of the period defined by the TUBE Frames Per Packet times the Bytes Per Frame times the bits per byte divided by the SCTCLOCK setting The Bytes Per Frame is set to 64 The TUBE FPP is user configurable and the bits per byte is 8 Permitted values of INTERVAL are 0 to 63 An Interval of 0 does not gap the clock SCR rate SCRCLOCK MODE x SCRCLOCK FACTOR x Percentage 100 Interval 1 178 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide Overhead FPP The Tube Frames per Packet FPP setting controls the number of data frames received on the RS530 interface to be encapsulated in a single IP UDP packet The IP Tube segments the data received on the RS530 interface into 64 byte frames If FPP is set to 1 then all IP packets transmitted out the Ethernet interface will cont
25. 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide int CO Host Contact No contact specified Host Location No location specified OurDNSServer IP Default router 255 255 255 255 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off SSHD Off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 2 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface S1 Type RS 530 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 32 102 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 32 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 1024 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S2 Type RS 530 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name
26. 68 94 156 1 OURDOMAINNAME domainnamestring If DDNS is enabled this string configures the fully qualified domain name string that we want to cor respond to our LAN1 or LAN2 IP address Note This name cannot exceed 63 characters Example ourdomainname us engage com ddns on 134 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Configuration The following Serial Interface commands are applicable to IP Tube DL and G models The serial inter face commands include those which configure the encapsulation parameters Refer to the T1 E1 or RS530 RS232 V 35 X 21 Interface configuration for their relevant parameters Note In multiport interface models care must be taken so that the correct interface is selected For example INT S3 selects the 3rd physical port TUBE ON OFF Turning Off the IP Tube stops the conversion of the Serial Port frames into IP packets TUBE PROTOCOL Commands PROTOCOL IPTUBE CESoIP HDLCoIP ADPIPTUBE SS7 The interface protocol controls the packetization format of the IP Tube PROTOCOL IPTUBE Protocol encapsulates the data bits selected into UDP packets PROTOCOL CESoIP Protocol encapsulates the data bits selected into UDP packets with an RTP header PROTOCOL HDLCoIP Protocol encapsulates HDLC frames into UDP packets with an RTP header This protocol is used to interconnect data networks that utilize WAN protocols such as PPP Frame Relay HDLC and SDLC
27. Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide information can be found e g at http www cs hut fi crypto The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions and restrictions Use only at your own responsibility You will be responsible for any legal consequences yourself am not making any claims whether possessing or using this is legal or not in your country and am not taking any responsibility on your behalf NO WARRANTY BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DA
28. Communication IP Tube User s Guide TUBE 1 2 ROUTE ON Enables the default route for IP Tube packets This default route takes precedence over the Ethernet interface default route and the system default route for routing IP Tube packets TUBE 1 2 ROUTE is not visible in the SHOW CONFIGURATION command until TUBE 1 2 ROUTE is configured to On TUBE 1 2 ROUTE OFF Disables this setting of default route for IP Tube packets IP Tube packets are routed using the Ethernet interface default route or the system default route TUBE 1 2 ROUTE is not visible in the SHOW CONFIGURATION command when TUBE 1 2 ROUTE OFF is configured TUBE 1 2 ROUTE addr configures the IP address of the IP Tube packet default route This must be an IP address on the same network as the IP Tube Ethernet interface TUBE UDPPORT value TUBE UDPPORT specifies the UDP port source and destination address The IP Tube only accepts packets that match its UDP Port configuration Note Engage has registered with the IANA UDP port 3175 decimal For the IP Tube use the follow ing UDP port numbers depending on which ports are activated e Port 1 UDP port 3175 Port2 UDP port 3176 Port3 UDP port 3177 Port4 UDP port 3178 TUBE 1 2 UDPPORT value TUBE UDPPORT specifies the UDP port source and destination address The 1 2 specifier indi cates the Ethernet interface for this UDP port source and destination address If 1 2 is not speci
29. Ethernet MAC address specified by the TUBE Ethernet Ad dress TUBE ETHERNET ARP ON uses the Ethernet MAC address obtained automatically by the IP Tube s IP to Ethernet MAC Address Resolution Protocol ARP Note The default configuration for TUBE ETHERNET ARP is On TUBE 1 2 ETHERNET ARP ON OFF The 1 2 specifier selects the Ethernet interface for TUBE ETHERNET ARP If 1 2 is not speci fied TUBE ETHERNET ARP is configured for LAN1 TUBE ETHERNET ADDRESS aabbccddeeff Specifies the Ethernet MAC address for the IP Tube IP packet The TUBE Ethernet MAC Address needs to match the MAC address of the destination IP Tube or the Default Router The MAC address is entered without the character Only enter the 6 bytes of MAC address i e 001122334455 Note Unless Broadcast storms are suspected it is highly recommended that the automatic resolution of the IP address to Ethernet MAC address is utilized TUBE 1 2 ETHERNET ADDRESS aabbccddeeff TUBE ETHERNET ADDRESS specifies the Ethernet MAC address for the IP Tube IP packet The 1 2 specifier selects the Ethernet interface for the Ethernet MAC address If 1 2 is not specified the Ethernet MAC address is configured for LAN1 TUBE 1 2 ROUTE ON OFF addr Used to configure the default route for IP Tube packets The 1 2 specifier indicates the Ethernet interface for the IP Tube packet default route 140 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage
30. Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter OxTf T1 TxUnderrunAIS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 1 T1 port Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 2 T1 ports 31 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Interface S3 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compressi
31. IP Default 000 000 000 000 No default IP address is needed unless the two units are on different subnets Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Default 000 000 00 000 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability On Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet ARP On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network 64 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Will get timing from the T1 connected to this unit making this unit the Master Clocking unit Interface S2 T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter OxT7f T1 Channels Full Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter 0x7f T1 Channels Full Slave Unit config Host Contact
32. Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 2 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full T1 EchoCanceller On T1 Signaling None T1 OffEchoChannels Slave Unit config Host Contact TestTube Host Location Test Environment 95 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide IP Default 192 168 2 50 Telnet On User Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Def Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 52 24 IP Def Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability On Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery On T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full T1 EchoCanceller On T1 Signaling None T1
33. Misc Carrier Dectect Loss during buffer reception Packets Transmitted Number of serial packets transmitted Transmit CSL CTS was lost during frame transmission Transmit UN Underrun the serial controller encountered a transmitter underrun while sending a buffer or a trans mit operation failed due to lack of buffers Transmit Misc Unspecified transmit error not associated with a buffer Packets Out Of Sequence A packet arrived out of sequence This indicates either a missing packet or a packet received out of order If Tube SequenceRecovery is On the packet is placed in the proper order and is not necessar ily a data error If Tube SequenceRecovery is Off this would be an error in the data stream Last Sequence Disruption x y Packet Sequence Disruption displays the sequence number of packets received adjacent to se quence number gaps For example if the display is 5 7 that means sequence number 6 was miss ing Or 5 56 would indicate 50 packets were missing Note the sequence number is modulo 255 so a display of 255 1 would mean only the packet with sequence number 0 is missing Packets Arriving Too Late The packet arrived with a sequence number that had already been transmitted on the serial port The IP network delayed the packet too late for transmission This is a data error Packets Arriving Late are counted only when Tube SequenceRecovery is On or Protocol ADPIPTube is selected Packets Not Arrivin
34. NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off 109 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 51 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3277 Tube 2 TOS 0x08 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S4 Type RS 232 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 51 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3278 Tube 2 TOS 0x08 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Example 15 IP Tube SER V 35 Master Unit Config for IP Tube SER RS530 DCE Internal Clocking int CO Host Contact No contact specified Host Location No location specified OurDNSServer IP Default router 255 255 255 255 110 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off SSHD Off Interface LAN1
35. OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 6 Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2 term BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders Markus Friedl Theo de Raadt Niels Provos Dug Song Aaron Campbell Damien Miller Kevin Steves Daniel Kouril Wesley Griffin Per Allansson Nils Nordman Simon Wilkinson Portable OpenSSH additionally includes code from the following copyright holders also under the 2 term BSD license Ben Lindstrom Tim Rice Andre Lucas Chris Adams Corinna Vinschen Cray Inc Denis Parker Gert Doering Jakob Schlyter Jason Downs Juha Yrj l 229 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Michael Stone Networks Associates Technology Inc Solar Designer Todd C Miller Wayne Schroeder William Jones Darren Tucker Sun Microsystems The SCO Group Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRE
36. ON Note The lastest versions of software have TUBE Sequence recovery set to ON and do not provide the CLI command for TUBE SEQUENCERECOVERY IP DUPLICATES 0 1 2 The IP Duplicates function sends duplicate packets This is useful for lossy networks Although transmission of duplicate packets requires double or triple the bandwidth and should only be used when there is sufficient bandwidth otherwise it can exacerbate the network interconnet s ability to provide a quality connection Tube SCADA Configuration Tube SCADAmode Off Remote SCADAmode enables features for SCADA applications When SCADAmode is Remote the IPTube performs two additional functions Serial input at Port 1 is duplicated on Port 2 In this way a remote station can be sending data to a central and backup control station The Serial Port 1 would be configured to go to the central control station and the Serial Port 2 would be configured to go to the backup control station Also when SCADAmode is Remote the IPTube determines whether the central or backup station is actively sending a message and routes that data to port 1 142 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Quality of Service TUBE ETHERNET 802 1P 802 1Q ON OFF Enables or disables IEEE 802 1P Q tagging of transmitted IP Tube packets ON enables 802 1q tagging for all outbound LAN packets and 802 1q processing for inbound LAN packets for th
37. Off T1 Data Normal 82 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU OdB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Interface S3 Type T1 Protocol ADPIPTube Protocol ADPIPTube DelayRetransmit 5 Protocol ADPIPTube LimitRetransmit 2 Protocol ADPIPTube CountRetransmit 1 Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Interface S4 Type T1 Protocol ADPIPTube Protocol ADPIPTube DelayRetransmit 5 Protocol ADPIPTube LimitRetransmit 2 Protocol ADPIPTube CountRetransmit 1 Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB 83 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full
38. On RateLimit 3 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off Interface LAN1 84 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide AutoNegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Def 192 168 1 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 AutoNegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 52 24 IP Def 192 168 1 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Framing E1 Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 2 TOS 08 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 16 Tube Compression Off Tube SequenceRecovery On Interface S2 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Ox7F E1 Channels Full Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 2 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Ox7F E1 Channels Full 85 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Interface S3 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destinatio
39. OpenBSD LICENCE v 1 19 2004 08 30 09 18 08 markus Exp OpenSSL Copyright notices LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl core openssl org OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2007 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 233 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide 9 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http Awww openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products de
40. Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAIS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 T1 ports Example 1 DLT1 Dual 10 100BaseT Two Active T1 Ports Scenario e with 2 LAN ports and 2 Serial ports both serial ports are configured to use LAN1 serial ports are set to TYPE T1 nocompression or echo cancellation SNMP is turned off autonegotiation is turned on thereby eliminating the need to set duplex and speed pa rameters e Telnet is turned on so the administrator can access the IP Tube unit remotely via the network BroadcastRCV is turned on for both LAN ports framing is set to T1Framed to coincide with the T1 circuits or CSU DSU s that are con nected to these ports Serial ports protocol set to IPTube this parameter controls the packetization format e of Service is set to it s highest priority 8 Buffers are set to 20 packets and Frames Per Packet are set to 56 on both serial ports see the Appendix for the timing this configuration derives Master clocking is set to Network so the unit will derive it s timing from the T1 the T1 s parameters are configured to match the incoming T1 s Master Unit config Host Contact TestUnit Host Location TestLab IP Default 000 000 000 000 Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 This IP address is the factory default You will need to enter your IP address IP Default
41. Please see the Table 13 Alarm Relay Contact in the Appendix for more information e OFF The AlarmRelay is disabled e LANFail The Alarm Relay closes if the unit detects it cannot reach the remote unit over the LAN This alarm may go off even when the Link Protector status is Up and would be a problem if the unit needed to fail over to TDM over IP The alarm ceases when IP connectivity to the remote unit is restored e TELFail The Alarm Relay closes if the unit detects a link down on the thru TEL interface It indicates the Link Protector status is in a Local Failed Over or Re mote Failed Over state and the unit is passing data via TDM over IP e LANorTELFail The Alarm Relay closes if either the LANFail or TELFail alarm is active The state of the Alarm Relay can be determined by displaying the output of the Show Info command within the global interface Alarm Relay can be Off Alarm Inactive or On Alarm Active Alarm Relay Off Reasons e Configured Off No Alarm 162 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Alamr Relay On Reasons TEL1 LAN Remote Unreachable Local unit cannot reach the LAN port of the Tube Destination in S1 e TEL2 Local Failed Local unit lost connectivity to T1 TEL2 Remote Failed Local unit cannot reach remote unit on TEL2 port TEL3 LAN Remote Unreachable Local unit cannot reach the LAN port of the Tube Destination in S3 e TEL4 Local
42. SER RS530 AutoProtect Chapter 9 IP Tube Configuration amp Operation This chapter provides operational theory and configuration details specific to the IP Tube model with Firmware Version 64 72 xx To verify Firmware Version login to unit and type show router IP Tube Installation Steps The process of installing an IP Tube involves the following steps e Planning for the IP Tube interconnect e Installing the IP Tube hardware e Configuring System and Ethernet parameters e Configuring the IP Tube interface parameters Making Ethernet and T3 cabling connections e Verifying IP Tube connectivity System and Ethernet Parameters The IPTube s System parameters and LAN interface configuration items are described in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface for specific syntax requirements This portion of the manual is dedicated to the installation parameters associated with the T3 interface T3 Parameters The IP Tube does not have any related configuration parameters All the data bits of the are put transparently into the Tube s IP packets The IPTubeT3 supports all T3 Framing and Coding configurations T3 Clocking Considerations Improper T3 clocking will result in an overrun or underrun condition which causes T3 frame losses There are two different clocking schemes The first configuration would have the local unit set for Internal clocking and the remote unit PLL This solution would be used if the IP
43. T1 E1 Switch feature PassThru On and Off deterimines wheth er the S1 interface is switched to the S2 interface or to the LAN interface When PassThru Protec tiveSwitch is LinkProtector the Link Protector automatically switches between the S2 interface and the LAN interface Link Protector Automatic Switch Criteria The Link Protector maintains the connection to the S2 interface as long as there is no Loss of Signal Loss of Framing or AIS Blue Alarm at the S2 port If any of these conditions are detected at the S2 port the Link Protector switches the S1 port to T1 E1 over IP When all the conditions are cleared the Link Protector switches the S1 port back to the S2 port Optionally a Yellow Alarm can be included in the conditions causing a switch This can be set by configuring Passthru Protec tiveSwitch AlarmHandling YELLOWALARM The PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector can be customized to test the links integrity of S2 before automatically switching to the LAN interface and back These parameters are FailoverPeriod FailoverThreshold FailbackPeriod and FailbackThreshold The FailoverPeriod and FailbackPe riod is the sample period in seconds The FailoverThreshold and FailbackThreshold are in terms of percent 24 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide Link Protector Command Line Interface PASSTHRU PROTECTIVE LINKPROTECTOR MANUAL When Passthru Protective is Manual the Link P
44. TestSlave Host Location Remote TestLab2 IP Default 000 000 000 000 Telnet On User Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 52 24 IP Default 000 000 000 000 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 000 000 000 000 ZLAN 2 is not used on this unit so it needs no IP Address IP Default 000 000 000 000 Port Off BroadcastRcv On 65 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability On Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter OxT7f T1 Channels Full Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharac
45. This mode is referred to as Master timing and is used when testing on the bench One unit set to Master the other to Slave It can also be used as a Master Clock for the E3 circuit if needed When set to Network the DSU CSU receives clocking from the TEL1 interface and uses it for clock ing the Transmit Data It is also passed on to the remote unit set for PLL When set to PLL the tube tunes its transmit clock to match the rate of the local tube Passing it on to the equipment it is connected to Example interface s1 e3 clocking internal save y Latency and Bandwidth Considerations The IP Tube has an adjustable setting to accommodate for Network jitter TUBE BUFFERS will set the amount of jitter tolerance the IP Tube will be able to handle on the Network The values are entered in milliseconds A TUBE BUFFERS value of 5 represents 5 ms of buffering a value of 8 would be 8 ms of buffering The minimum and maximum values are 3 to 15 This setting should match on both units The round trip delay can be calculated by multiplying the TUBE BUFFERS value by 2 The IP Tube has a fixed parameter for TUBE FPP frames per packet not displayed in the configu ration The 8 000 bits of E3 are loaded into IP packet that is IP addressed and sent to the other IPTube E3 where these bits are buffered Example interface s1 tube buffers 8 save y IP Packet Encapsulation Overhead The encapsulation of E3 data into IP UDP pac
46. Tube pack ets in every Tube packet sent The receiving Tube can then detect and retransmit missing packets 135 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide SS7 Protocol PROTOCOL SS7 SS7 Protocol encapsulates SS7 Messages into packets TUBE FISUMASK value This value must be a ten digit hex number and must be set to OXFFFFFFFFFF Example interface s1 tube fisumask ffffffffff TUBE LSSURETRANSMIT ON OFF ON enables automatic transmission of LSSUs upon startup to provide compatibility with certain soft switches OFF disables automatic transmission of LSSUs upon startup Example interface s1 tube Issuretransmit on TUBE LOOPBACK Commands TUBE LOCALLOOP ON OFF IP Tube models DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 only Turning on LOCALLOOP causes the IP Tube to loop frames on the Serial Port Frames received on the Serial Port are transmitted back on the Serial Port Tube packets received on the Ethernet inter face are not transmitted on the Serial Port when LOCALLOOP is on LOCALLOOP takes effect after saving a configuration but will be set Off after a subsequent reset Turning LOCALLOOP ON performs the same function as setting the TUBE ADDRESS to the same IP address as the Ethernet interface or setting DIP Switch 4 to On TUBE REMOTELOOP ON OFF IP Tube models DLT1 DLE1 QT1 QE1 only Turning on REMOTELOOP causes the IP Tube to loop tube packets on the Ethernet interface Valid tube pack
47. Tube solution is needed to provide clocking for the circuit Mas ter Circuit Clock The unit set for Internal would be providing the Master Clock and the other unit set for PLL to provide clocking for the remote end The equipment connected to the IP Tubes would need to be set to receive clocking from the IP Tubes The second setup would require one IP Tube set for Network clocking and the remote unit PLL This solution is required when an IP Tube needs to receive clocking from the equipment connected to the T3 interface Master Circuit Clock The unit set for Network would be receive clocking from the T3 interface and pass it along to the remote unit which would be set for PLL to pass clocking to the equipment that is connected to The equipment connected to the Network IP Tube would need to generate clocking and the equipment connected to the PLL unit needs to be set to receive clocking 187 Engage Communication User s Guide T3 CLOCKING INTERNAL NETWORK PLL Determines the source of Transmit Clock TxCk When set to Internal the DSU CSU transmits data at a rate set by an internal oscillator This mode is referred to as Master timing and is used when testing on the bench One unit set to Master the other to Slave It can also be used as a Master Clock for the T3 circuit if needed When set to Network the DSU CSU receives clocking from the TEL1 interface and uses it for clock ing the Transmit Data It i
48. Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Interface S3 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off 77 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off Interface S4 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Examp
49. V2PLL V2PLL Stands for Version2 PLL Version2 PLL has a tighter frequency lock compared to PLL The setting Clocking Internal is used when no other clock source is available or when the IP Tube is being tested or configured on a bench Rate Limiter The IP Tube GT1 E1 can be configured with a rate limiter feature check with Engage Communica tions Sales Department which will control the flow of data outputted from LAN2 This does not limit the use of LAN 1 but is specific to LAN2 only Two parameters are new with the Rate Limiter Spanning On Off Spanning Tree is a protocol that governs operation of a bridge If turned On the unit will utilize this protocol RateLimit 1 20 The Rate Limit parameter will set the megabits per second options are 1 Mbps to 20 Mbps of output on LAN2 ONLY Some devices will be restricted in how many Mbps can be received such as ADSL or SDSL Routers and the Tube unit can manage the output to coincide with the receiving device TOS QoS and UDP Port Number The IP Tube TOS command is used to control the Type of Service Byte in the IP packets containing the encapsulated data The setting of the TOS byte can be used to ensure that the real time data from the IP Tube is accorded high priority as it traverses the IP network Support for the TOS byte is re quired within each router or switch making up the interconnect between the IP Tubes A TOS setting of 0x08 maximizes throughput Settings for TOS r
50. a burst of packets are received that are greater than the Tube Buffer setting 141 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide TUBE FPP value for T1 interfaces Frames Per Packet specifies the number of frames received on the T1 interface to be encapsulated in a single IP UDP packet The size of the serial interface frame depends on the interface provided in the IP Tube For the T1 interface the frame size is 192 bits 1 framing bit depending on T1Framing config T1 FPP is configurable in increments of 8 Proper configuration of FPP is appplication dependent Low latency applications such as voice require minimum Frames Per Packet The recommended T1 configuration for low latency is FPP 8 TUBE FPP value for E1 Interfaces FPP Frames Per Packet specifies the number of frames received on the E1 interface to be en capsulated in a single IP UDP packet The size of the serial interface frame depends on the interface provided in the IP Tube For the E1 interface the frame size is 256 bits E1 FPP is configurable in increments of 4 Proper configuration of FPP is application dependent Low latency applications such as voice require minimum Frames Per Packet The recommended E1 configuration for low latency is FPP 8 TUBE SEQUENCERECOVERY ON OFF Sequence Recovery puts out of order packets in the proper sequence for transmission out the TDM interface This function should always be
51. can recover missing packets It is more advantageous for the ADP protocol if the ADP window is increased by increasing Tube Buf fers rather than increasing Frames Per Packet For the ADP protocol to work properly Tube Buffers and Frames Per Packet must be set to the same value on the local and remote Tubes Retransmission Every time the IP Tube has a Tube packet to send the ADP protocol determines whether to Retrans mit any missing packets as well The configuration parameters LimitRetransmit DelayRetransmit and CountRetransmit are used to shape the algorithm that determines which unacknowledged packets are retransmitted The LimitRetransmit configuration parameter determines the maximum number of packets ADP will Retransmit after it has sent a Tube packet Unacknowledged packets not retransmitted because of LimitRetransmit have priority for retransmission after the next Tube packet is sent LimitRetransmit typically should be set to 2 In bandwidth limited IP networks it can be set to 1 to 17 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide reduce load on the network However a value of 1 may not be sufficient if packet loss is high The DelayRetransmit configuration parameter determines how long ADP should wait before retrans mitting an unacknowledged packet The delay should be at least the Round Trip Time the time it takes for a Tube packet to travel to the remote Tube and for the acknowl
52. copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 9 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjn cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
53. incompatible with the protocol description in the RFC file it must be called by a name other than ssh or Secure Shell Tatu continues However am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or copyrights held by third parties and the software includes parts that are not under my direct control As far as know all included source code is used in accordance with the relevant license agreements and can be used freely for any purpose the GNU license being the most restrictive see below for details However none of that term is relevant at this point in time All of these restrictively licenced software components which he talks about have been removed from OpenSSH i e RSA is no longer included found in the OpenSSL library IDEA is no longer included its use is deprecated DES is now external in the OpenSSL library GMP is no longer used and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL Zlib is now external in a library The make ssh known hosts script is no longer included TSS has been removed MD5 is now external in the OpenSSL library RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL Blowfish is now external in the OpenSSL library The licence continues Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore scientific library and patent office worldwide More 226
54. is possible that there is not enough buffering for the jitter on the net work increase Tube Buffers and or Tube FPP Rcvd Bad Source IP Addr Packets that are received with the correct UDP port but the IP Tube did not have the source address match the Tube Destination address in the configuration This packet is dropped Rogue device sending packets aimed at the IP Tube UDP port number or misconfiguration of the IP Tube Rcvd Bad UDP Port A UDP packet received with the correct destination and source IP ad dress did not have the UDP source and destination port number match the Tube UDPPort number in the configuration This packet is dropped There could be an IP conflict with the IP Tube or misconfiguration of the IP Tube 210 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide 211 Transmit Drain Drops This is a serial transmit queue overflow The number of packets in the serial transmit queue exceeds the setting of Tube Buffers by 3 packets and is dropped Check clocking configurations and try increasing Tube Buffers and or Tube FPP May occur if there are duplicate packets being created in the network Tube Overflowlimit has a default setting of 3 try increasing this to 10 Receive Positive Slips This is a data error not shown in any other error statistic When this error occurs there is a possibility that up to two T1 or E1 frames are lost When the IP Tube is set for Clock
55. is used to regulate the IP gt TUBE RS530 RS232 V 35 s packet rate Regulation of the packet rate provides for a latency minimizing mechanism to control the data rate of the IP TUBE RS530 V 35 The Interval setting can be utilized to clock data out of the DTE into a packet at its maximum clocking rate to minimize latency There are 2 methods of controlling the IP Tube data rate One method is to set the SCxCLOCK rates to the data rate required and have the TUBE INTERVAL set to 0 This method can double the delay if there is a WAN link in the IP Tube network connec tion Another method is to set the SCxCLOCK to the DTE s maximum clocking rate and regulate the packet rate with the Interval setting TUBE INTERVAL should be set to 0 when the IP TUBE RS530 RS232 V35s are interconnected across an Ethernet IP network that does not have links with data rates that are significantly below the maximum clocking rate of the DTE For example with a 10 100BaseT Ethernet interconnect it is recommended that the TUBE INTERVAL be set to 0 and that the TUBE SCxCLOCK MODE and FACTOR are used to control the clocking of the DTE directly The TUBE INTERVAL command is used to control the gapping of the SCTCLOCK on a packet load ing basis The SCRCLOCK should be set to the maximum clocking rate of the DTE The purpose of the TUBE INTERVAL setting is to provide for a method to clock data out of a DTE and into a packet at the maximum data rate and then to wait for the interval
56. of the relay Pin 2 Pin2 of the other side of the relay Operation Pin1 will be connected to Pin2 in the event of an alarm Maximum current for the relay is 1A Table 14 Alarm Relay Contact 223 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Emu tion Upgrade of Engage IP Tube IP Express BlackBond and BlackDoor Systems General This document outlines the procedure for upgrading Engage IP Tube IP Express BlackBond and BlackDoor system software Procedure 1 To determine the current system software and if running from Base or Upgrade Flash issue the command show router If currently running from the Upgrade Flash the unit must be downgraded back to Base Flash before installing a new Upgrade Flash image a Issue the command upgrade 1 1 b The unit will reboot and revert to Base Flash c This will cause a Telnet connection to drop If this does occur simply re establish the Telnet connection The upgrade requires a local TFTP trivial file transfer protocol server Shareware TFTP servers are available online including http www klever net kin pumpkin html Obtain the upgrade file and unzip password if required from Engage Communication Technical Support tel 1 831 688 1021 or support engageinc com Place the upg file in the appropriate directory on TFTP server Ensure IP connectivity between the Engage unit and the TFTP server by pinging from one to the other Firewall software on the
57. of time that allows for the slowest WAN router in the packet s route to send the packet out to it s serial interface before the IPe TUBE sends the next packet The use of the TUBE INTERVAL setting minimizes latency and is great for connecting DTEs across 64kilobit WAN links such as ISDN 175 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide Note The gapping of the clock is not recommended for Video interconnects and can effect the syn chronization modes used by Encryptors The duration of the off clocking interval is detemined by the number of bytes in the packet which is controlled by the Frames Per Packet setting multiplied by the Bytes per frame of 64 times the TUBE INTERVAL setting Shorter off intervals have an adverse effect on overhead Interval Data Rate Kbps 1 544 772 Table 1 Interval vs Serial Interface Data Rate with SCTCLOCK set to 1 544Mbps 176 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide IP Tube Percentage The TUBE PERCENTAGE parameter in conjunction with the SCxCLOCK MODE FACTOR and TUBE INTERVAL setting controls the SCTCLOCK clocking on the RS 530 RS232 V 35 serial interface The TUBE PERCENTAGE is used to gate the SCTCLOCK to reduce the number of clock pulses by 87 75 50 and
58. packet stream if the Primary port is either down or consistently mssing packets Packets arriving on the Primary port form the basis for maintaining the serial transmit queue at a size of Tube Buffers It is expected that the packets have arrived earlier from the Secondary port Pack ets from the Secondary port will be used to fill the serial transmit queue if packets are missing from the Primary port 138 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide TUBE LANPORT Alternator Configuration TUBE LANPORT Alternate The ALTERNATE setting enables IP Tube load splitting in which the load is split across both Ethernet interfaces Note Each LAN port has independent configurations for its IP Address and Default Router Gateway Note Transmit packets can be sent on one Ethernet and Received on the other to support Asymetri cal Bandwidth connections such as ADSL Alternatively the IPTubes packets can send the Even numbered packets on one LAN and odd pack ets on the other LAN with the ALTERNATOR Option Note ALTERNATE is used when bandwidth is limited on the LAN1 or LAN2 and there is sufficient bandwidth for the T1 E1 Over IP traffic when it is split over multiple WAN connections such as xDSL If WAN fault tolerance is required either the LAN1 or LAN2 connection fails a reduced bandwidth connection be activated with the A tProtector Configuration TUBE LANPORT AltProtector Configuration TUBE LA
59. physical interface transitions from being disconnected to connected linkDown this trap is generated when a physical interface transitions from being connected to disconnected e authenticationFailure this trap is generated when a login to the user interface or an SNMPv1 SetRequest failed because an incorrect password was given e enterprisespecific these are Engage proprietary traps We define the following subcategories e engageTrapRxOverrun this trap is generated when excessive receiver overruns are happening on an interface engageTrapTxUnderrun this trap is generated when excessive transmitter un derruns are happening on an interface e engageTrapBufferExhaustion this trap is generated when the device runs out of free buffers for packet processing engageTrapDeafness this trap is generated when an interface on the box has not received packets for a long period of time engageTrapTubeEnetRxAbsent this trap is generated when an IP Tube has not been receiving IP Tube encapsulated IP packets on it s LAN Interface when it expects to be For more detail on the industry standard traps please see http www faqs org rfcs rfc1157 html 27 Chapter 3 Installation Chapter 4 Configuration Examples The following two examples are generic in that they will properly configure the most basic T1 Tube with one to four ports Use only the portion of the example that matches the number of ports that are being c
60. servers 237 Glossary Engage Communication User s Guide Communication Link Definitions Synchronous Serial Interfaces A serial interface between two devices which provides for bi directional data transfer as well as clock ing One device the DCE provides the transmit and the receive timing to the second device the DTE Data Communication Equipment DCE This interfaces to the communication service s transmission reception medium and includes T1 Voice Data Multiplexors 64 56 Kilobit DSU CSUs and Fiber Optic Modems The DCE provides the transmit and receive data pathways along with their synchronous clocking signals that are used by a router s DTE interface for full duplex communication between the remotely interconnected networks Data Terminal Equipment DTE This equipment attaches to the terminal side of Data Communication Equipment Data Carrier Detect DCD A signal that indicates to the DTE that the DCE is receiving a signal from a remote DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR Prepares the DCE to be connected to the phone line then the connection can be established by dial ing Enables the DCE to answer an incoming call on a switched line Other Terms TCXO Temperature Controled Oscillator OCXO Oven Controlled Oscillator 238 Glossary
61. the port If it is not see Show Information for the TEL port for more information Receive CRC CRC error Should not occur with Protocol IPTube Receive Overrun Overrun of internal FIFO used in transfer of serial data to memory or a frame was received and discarded due to lack of buffers or a large frame was received Possible broadcast storm or configuration error on IP Tube with support ing particular LAN Speed Duplex setting Receive Framing Set when a frame containing a number of bits not exactly divisible by eight is received Possible incorrect Protocol setting on IP Tube HDLCOIP faulty cable or clocking configuration error on either device Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide 209 Receive Misc Carrier Detect Loss during buffer reception The Protocol setting on IP Tube could be set incorrectly HDLCOIP Packets Transmitted Number of serial packets transmitted Check to see if there are Received LAN Packets If there are no packets received on the LAN port there will be no packets transmitted on the TEL port Transmit CSL CTS was lost during frame transmission Possible causes are IPTube reset OMNI reset cable pulled or other interface electrical failure Transmit UN Underrun the serial controller encountered a transmitter underrun while sending a buffer or a transmit operation failed due to lack of buffers Increase T
62. to Four Port Models e Connects directly to T1 Line or to a 051 interface with a Crossover Cable 212 Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Framing ESF or D4 Coding B8ZS or AMI Supports DSO assignments from 1 to 24 e Non Contiguous Configuration x y z supported E1 Specifications to Four Port Models Connects directly to E1 Line or to a DS1 interface with a Crossover Cable Framing E1Framed or Transparent e Coding HDB3 or AMI Supports DSO assignments from 1 to 24 Not Contiguous Configuration x y z Supported DLT1 E1 and GT1 E1 Models Lossless Data Compression Detects idle and redundant data within each DSO Interconnect bandwidth is not consumed by silent or redundant data within the voice circuits Low Latency 16 to 1 Compression Quality of Service Support Type of Service TOS CLI configurable Registered UDP Port 3175 e Configurable Silence Detection Range Compression settings from 8 to 1 to 56 to 1 Echo Cancellation e Digital Signal Processor e Voiceband Echo Cancelling according to ITU G 165 and G 168 e Mu and A Law coding according to ITU G 711 24channels with end echo path delay of less than 63 75 ms 213 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide All Models TFTP Online Upgrade Capable FLASH ROMs P Tube is fully operational during upgrade Management Telnet support with Edit and Paste Templa
63. 0 000 000 000 Telnet On User Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 2 52 24 IP Default 192 168 2 1 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 000 000 000 000 ZLAN 2 is not used on this unit so it needs no IP Address IP Default 000 000 000 000 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Interface S2 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter OxT7f T1 Channels Full T1 EchoCanceller On T1 Signaling None T1 OffEchoChannels Type T1 Protocol IPTube 69 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data T1 Clocking T1 LBO T1 Framing T1 Coding T1 IdleCharacter T1 Channels T1 EchoCanceller T1 Signaling Normal V2
64. 000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S4 Type RS 232 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 50 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3278 Tube 2 TOS 0xB8 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Slave Unit Config for IP Tube SER RS232 DCE PLL Clocking int co Host Contact No contact specified Host Location No location specified OurDNSServer 107 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide IP Default router 255 255 255 255 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off SSHD Off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 2 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface S1 Type RS 232 Mode Synchronou
65. 00000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 1024 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S3 Type RS 530 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE 100 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 32 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 32 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 50 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3277 Tube 2 TOS 0xB8 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 1024 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S4 Type RS 530 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 32 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 32 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 50 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3278 Tube 2 TOS 0xB8 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 1024 Tube Duplicates 0 Slave Unit Config for IP Tube SER RS530 DCE PLL Clocking 101 Chapter
66. 1 e TEL2 Local Failed Local unit lost connectivity to 1 e TEL2 Remote Failed Local unit cannot reach remote unit on TEL2 port e LAN Remote Unreachable Local unit cannot reach the LAN port of the Tube Destination in S3 e TELA Local Failed Local unit lost connectivity to T1 e TEL4 Remote Failed Local unit cannot reach remote unit on TEL4 port PASSTHRU STATUS Reports the current status of the link When reporting PassThru data is being sent out the S2 inter face If reports IP Tube data is being sent out the LAN interface SNMP Support All Engage products support Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP version 1 SNMP sup port provides access via IP to groups of administrative configuration related and statistical informa tion objects about the Engage device An Ethernet connection to the device and a PC with an applica tion which provides an SNMP version 1 client are required An SNMP client will query the device and display the information objects and their values to the user Groups of SNMP information objects are referred to as MIBs Management Information Base The Engage IP Tube products support most of MIB II MIB 2 Subgroups of information in MIB II are listed below Please email suport engageinc com for Engage Communication MIB Definitions System group contains system information such as a designated system identifier location and vendor ID Engage Interface group contains information ab
67. 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 This config will include 8 channels starting with channel 1 plus channels 16 thru 18 and channel 24 Interface S4 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 LBO CSU 0dB E1 Framing ESF E1 Coding B8ZS E1 IdleCharacter Ox7f E1 Channels Fractional 1 8 16 18 24 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 LBO CSU 0dB E1 Framing ESF E1 Coding B8ZS E1 IdleCharacter Ox7f E1 Channels Fractional 1 8 16 18 24 93 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide Example 10 DLT1 Dual LAN Ports Two Active Serial Ports with Compression and Echo Cancellation and Assured Delivery Protocol Scenario e with 2 LAN ports and 2 Serial ports e serial ports are set to TYPE T1 compression and echo cancellation are enabled SNMP is turned off autonegotiation is turned on e Telnet is turned on BroadcastRCV is turned on for both LAN ports ARP is turned on for both serial ports the seri
68. 1 UDPPORT 3178 46 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter 7F Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 E1 ports Clocking Internal Example Site A IPTube is clocking Internal Site B IPTube is clocking V2PLL The IPTube is the source of the T1 clock This is useful in test environments or when the IPTube is replacing a T1 segment that provided clock Stand alone PBX to PBX configurations would require this clocking if neither PBX was providing clock This is a T1 configuration The T1 Clocking parameter in this example would apply to an E1 configuration as well IPTube A T1 Clocking Internal Example co int Host Name IPTube A Host Location Site A Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 50 24 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off 47 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tub
69. 16 Alternatively for channels in use that are not contiguous NN and MM are single T1 channels in use and Y Z are a range of T1 channels in use Single channels and ranges are separated by commas and can be combined on a command line For example an ISDN PRI link uses channel 24 for D Channel signaling and 5 20 for voice circuits T1 FRAC 5 20 24 TUBE LoopCodeResponse LLBCSU LLBTube RLBCSU RLBTube OFF This format of the command specifies what type of response if any the selected serial interface en acts if a loop code is received LLBCSU specifies that a loop code will either enable or disable local loopback through the CSU hardware LLBTube specifies that a loop code will either enable or disable Tube Localloop which is a packet path loopback RLBCSU specifies that a loop code will either enable or disable remote loopback through the remote IPTube s CSU hardware RLBTube specifies that a loop code will either enable or disable Tube Remoteloop which is a packet path loopback If RLBCSU or RLBTube are specified then Tube AcceptRLBResponse must be On at the remote IPTube If Tube LoopCodeResponse is off then a loop code will not affect the loopback state of either IPTube Example config int s1 tube loopcoderesponse Ilbcsu TUBE LoopCodeResponse UP CODE LENGTH NN DOWN CODE LENGTH NN If the first argument is UP CODE specifies the hexadecimal code for LOOP UP and LENGTH speci fies the length of th
70. 24 IP Default 192 168 2 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 000 000 000 000 IP Default 000 000 000 000 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On 89 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Framing must be set to Transparent when using fractional E1 s Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Interface S2 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Network E1 LBO CSU 0dB E1 Framing ESF E1 Coding B8ZS E1 IdleCharacter Ox7f E1 Channels Fractional 1 8 16 24 This config will include 8 channels starting with channel 1 and 16 thru 24 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Interface S3 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Network E1LBO CSU 0dB E1 Framing ESF E1 Coding B8ZS E1 IdleCharacter Ox7f E1 Channels Fractional 1 8 16 24 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop O
71. 256 Kbps and the user has configured FPP at 8 the actual data rate on the ethernet LAN is 256 1 086 278 Kbps Data Rate and Timing Concerns Gaps Large packets sizes and large interval settings result in significant gaps between IP UDP pack ets as they are received by the IP Tube These gaps can result in higher level protocol timeouts Bit Stuffing Overhead If the IP UDP packet will be traversing a WAN link the possible effect of bit stuffing in the WAN protocol such as PPP or Frame Relay can introduce an additional 1096 of over head Note Consider a 256 Kbps satellite link which carries data via the PPP WAN protocol User should consider the effect of bit stuffing in the PPP encapsulation and reduce the WAN rate by 10 to 230 Kbps Latency Certain traffic types are particularly sensitive to latency the rountrip delay of data from end to end The user should take into account the latency or delay introduced by the LAN WAN intercon nect to determine total delay Data Rate for Enhanced Mode the LAN bit rate is calculated as SCR freq 64 FPP 45 64 FPP For Example at SCR 384K and the FPP 1 the data rate is 654000 For Example at SCR 256K and the FPP 1 the data rate is 436000 180 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide IPeTube RS530 Notes for X 21 Operation The IP Tube RS530 can be used for X 21 communication F
72. 3P2M The TUBE SCTCLOCKMODE setting in combination with the SCTCLOCKFACTOR controls the fre quency of the Serial DCE interface s Serial Clock Transmit TUBE SCTCLOCKFACTOR value TUBE SCTCLOCK MODE NXxxx is multiplied by SCTCLOCK FACTOR to produce the SCTCLOCK NX300 clock rate from 300 to 5 4K as multiples of 300 e NX2KA clock rate from 2 4K to 43 2K as multiples of 2 4K NX56K clock rate from 56K to 1792K as multiples of 56k e NX64K clock rate from 64K to 2048K as multiples of 64K NX100K clock rate from 100K to 800K valid factors 1 2 4 and 8 e 2 clock rate from 3 2M to 25 6M valid factors 1 2 4 and 8 182 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide TUBE BYTESPERPACKET value Bytes Per Packet specifies the number of bytes received on the Serial Interface to be encapsulated in a single IP UDP packet The maximum allowable BytesPerPacket is 1460 The minimum is a function of the clock speed of the serial interface This is calculated to be clock speed 32000 1 rounded up to a multiple of 4 except in the case of NX300 which can be any number The BytePerPacket must be a multiple of 4 except in the case of NX300 which can be any number Examples e 2400bps Minimum BytesPerPacket 4 54Kbps Minimum BytesPerPacket 4 64Kbps Minimum BytesPerPacket 4 e 100Kbps Minimum BytesPerPacket 8 e 2 048Mbps NX
73. 64K Factor 32 Minimum BytesPerPacket 68 e 12 8Mbps NX3P2 Factor 4 Minimum BytesPerPacket 404 Other Important Calculations Calculating IP Packet Delay Bytes Per Packet 8 Frequency Calculating IP Frequency per second 1 IP Packet Delay Calculating IP Tube Latency one way Bytes Per Packet 8 Buffers Frequency SER RS232 Asynchronous Specific Configurations MODE SYNCHRONOUS ASYNCHRONOUS This will configure the RS232 interface for Synchronous or Asynchronous operation NOTE Changing this configuration parameter may require a power cycle of the IP Tube SPEED 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 64000 Speeds that the SER RS232 supports e 1200 baud e 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud e 19200 baud e 38400 baud 64000 baud DATABITS 5 617 8 Available configuration for Data Bits STOPBITS 1 2 Supported Stop Bits are 1 and 2 183 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide PARITY NONE EVEN ODD Available Parity are None Even and Odd SER PIO Port Specific Operation The PIO port is a special port that will transport TTL signal levels There are four input and four output pins The status of these signals are monitored and transported across the IP Tube connection For example If IN3 goes LOW at the local location then the output on the remote IP Tube of OUTS will also be LOW Whe
74. Address Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Buffers 5 Tube Duplicates 0 E3 Clocking Internal 198 Chapter 10 IP Tube Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide LEGACY IP Tube E3 Configuration amp Operation This chapter provides operational theory and configuration details specific to the IP Tube model with Firmware Version 39 72 xx To verify Firmware Version login to unit and type show router IP Tube Installation Steps The process of installing an IP Tube involves the following steps e Planning for the IP Tube interconnect e Installing the IP Tube hardware e Configuring System and Ethernet parameters e Configuring the IP Tube interface parameters Making Ethernet and E3 cabling connections e Verifying IP Tube connectivity System and Ethernet Parameters The IPTube s System parameters and LAN interface configuration items are described in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface for specific syntax requirements This portion of the manual is dedicated to the installation parameters associated with the E3 interface E3 Parameters The IP Tube does not have any related configuration parameters All the data bits of the are put transparently into the Tube s IP packets The IPTubeE3 supports all E3 Framing and Coding configurations E3 Clocking Consi
75. Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 2 51 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface S1 Type V 35 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 111 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S2 Type V 35 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ether
76. Communication IP Tube DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 RS530DL HS RS232 X 21 V 35 SER T3 E3 UNO G4 User s Guide Eng mun on Inc 9565 Soquel Drive Suite 200 Aptos California 95003 TEL 831 688 1021 FAX 831 688 1421 www engageinc com support engageinc com Revision 11 Seller warrants to the Original Buyer that any unit shipped to the Original Buyer under normal and proper use be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 24 months from the date of shipment to the Original Buyer This warranty will not be extended to items repaired by anyone other than the Seller or its authorized agent The foregoing warranty is exclu sive and in lieu of all other warranties of merchantability fitness for purpose or any other type whether express or implied A All claims for breach of the foregoing warranty shall be deemed waived un less notice of such claim is received by Seller during the applicable warranty period and unless the items to be defective are returned to Seller within thirty 30 days after such claim Failure of Seller to receive written notice of any such claim within the applicable time period shall be deemed an absolute and unconditional waiver by buyer of such claim irrespec tive of whether the facts giving rise to such a claim shall have been discovered or whether processing further manufactur ing other use or resale of such items shall have then taken place B Buyer s exclusive remedy and Seller s
77. E1 DSU CSU then TUBE BUFFERING must be used along with having one IPe TUBE RS530 RS232 V35 set to be the clock master TUBE CLOCK INTERNAL and the other s TUBE CLOCK set to PLL The amount of buffering depends upon the worst case Network conges tion related inter packet delay The buffering of Tube packets introduces elasticity that is calculated by taking the number of data bits in each buffered packet TUBE FPP times Bytes Per Frame times the TUBE BUFFER setting and dividing this by the SCRCLOCK Note The clocking of the data out of the IP Tube and into the DTE only occurs only when there are bits to be clocked so that an underrun condition is not relevant and clock gapping occurs when there are not any bits in the IP TUBE Ethernet receive buffer IP Tube Clock The TUBE CLOCK command is used to set the source of the Serial Clock Receive and Transmit Tim ing signals When SCRCLOCK needs to match the SCTCLOCK exactly with a smooth non gapped clock TUBE INTERVAL 0 then one of the IP gt TUBE RS530 RS232 V 35s needs to have its TUBE CLOCK set to INTERNAL and the other needs to be set to PLL and the TUBE BUFFER needs to be utilized 174 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide IP Tube Interval Note Tube Interval was used in legacy equipment and is left here for informational purposes It is recommended that Tube Interval be set to 0 TUBE INTERVAL
78. Example 8 Dual LAN Ports Four Active E1 Ports with Rate Limiter In ternal Clocking Scenario e with 2 LAN ports and 4 Serial ports Rate Limiter is set to 3 Spanning Tree protocol is turned on serial ports are set to TYPE E1 capabilty SNMP is turned off autonegotiation is turned on e Telnet is turned on so the administrator can access the IP Tube unit remotely via the network BroadcastRCV is turned on for both LAN ports is turned on for all 4 serial ports serial ports are set to E1Framed to coincide with the E1 circuits or CSU DSU s that are connected to these ports Full E1 s of Service is set to it s highest priority 8 Buffers are set to 5 packets and Frames Per Packet are set to 16 on both serial ports see the appendix for the timing this configuration derives Master clocking is set to Network so the unit will derive it s timing from the E1 e E1 s are configured to match the incoming E1 s parameters This unit is set up with Engage s Rate Limiter feature which will control the output of the LAN2 port You will notice that 2 serial ports are set to output on LAN2 to take advantage of this feature The Rate Limit param eter is set to 20 In this example Spanning Tree Protocol is turned on Master Unit config Host Contact Test Tube Host Location Test Lab IP Default 000 000 000 000 Spanning
79. Failed Local unit lost connectivity to 1 TEL4 Remote Failed Local unit cannot reach remote unit on TELA port PASSTHRU STATUS Reports the current status of the link When reporting PassThru data is being sent out the S2 inter face If reports IP Tube data is being sent out the LAN interface Example PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector AlarmHandling YellowAlarm PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector FailoverPeriod 10 PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector FailoverThreshold 60 PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector FailbackPeriod 10 PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector FailbackThreshold 40 PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector AlarmRelay LANFail PassThru Status PassThru The above example shows that on a Yellow Alarm the LinkProtector will Failover to the LAN interface when the integrity of the link has errored 60 or more of the10 second period 6 seconds and will Failback to the S2 interface when the errors occurs less than 4096 of the 10 second period 4 sec onds For immediate Failover and Failback set the LinkProtector using the following settings PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector FailoverPeriod 1 PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector FailoverThreshold 10 PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector FailbackPeriod 1 PassThru ProtectiveSwitch LinkProtector FailbackThreshold 10 Rate Limiter The IP Tube GT1 E1 can be configured with a rate limiter feature which
80. For E1 Framing CRC4 or FAS When in the Connected state the LNK LED on the corresponding TEL port will light up E1 cables must be balanced When connecting to a T1 E1 interface of T1 E1 equipment a T1 E1 cross over cable is required There is one yellow T1 E1 cross over cable sent per port with the IP Tube For E1 connections the cross over cable is used between the RJ45 connector on the IP Tube and the RJ45 to DB15 Male adapter also provided with the shipment When connecting to a T1 E1 line use a standard RJ45 cable 8 straight 1 to 1 An easy way to test the port is to insert a RJ45 loop back plug Pin1 to Pin4 and Pin2 to Pin5 into the port Then check that the TEL port s Tube Framing is set for Transparent if it is not change it for the test This test should result in the port showing Connected status and light the LNK LED The IP Tube will not transmit any data if the LNK LED is off 206 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Statistics 207 Here is a sample of the Show Statistics command of a LAN port This is an error log that count the errors that occur on the interface The data will keep until the unit is power cycled or a Clear All com mand is issued to clear the statistics log A description of the errors are below with an explanation of why they may be occurring Tube sh lan1 stat Interface Errors Packets Received 42792396 Receive CRC LAN1 Packets Transmit
81. N port 8021Q VLANID NN Specifies the VLAN ID for the tag on all transmitted LAN packets This value only has effect if IEEE 8021Q tagging of LAN packets is enabled DHCP Client amp Dynamic Addressing amp Dynamic DNS DHCPCLIENT ON OFF Enables or disables IP address requesting for this LAN port via DHCP When a DHCP server has granted us an IP address it is displayed in the configuration ON enables this LAN port to send DHCP discovery packets and use the IP address that a DHCP server will assign to it OFF disables DHCP discovery and relies on the user s setting of LAN s IP address Note DHCP discovery will take precedence the LAN specific IP address and default router settings but not the OurDNSServer setting TUBE 1 2 DYNAMICADDRESS ON OFF ON enables the Tube to automatically discover the IP address of its partner this requires that UDP port numbers of both Tubes match OFF disables automatic discovery and relies on the user setting of Tube Destination Address In order for the automatic detection to work the remote IP Tube s UDP port number must match the UDP port number of this Tube If the IP Tube does not successfully detect the address of the remote IP Tube no IP Tube encapsulated packets are sent out either LAN port Note Tube DynamicAddress takes precedence over whatever Tube Destination address is present TUBE 1 2 DESTINATION address fullyqualifieddomainnamestring The IP address or fully q
82. NPORT AltProtector The ALPROTECTOR setting selects the combination of Alternate and Protector When both LAN ports are available the IPTube load balances between them as in the Alternate op tion If one of the LAN connections becomes unavailable or has degraded by the criteria set for the Tube Protector option the IPTube traffic is sent exclusively down the available LAN port Tube Protector Criteria refer to the TUBE PROTECTOR commands for more details Tube Protector PollingPeriod nn Tube Protector RxOutOfSequence nn Tube Protector RxPacketPercent nnn Tube Protector TxDrainDrops nn Tube Protector TxUnderruns nn Tube Protector Qualification nn If the TUBE fails over to a single LAN connection the TDM over IP connection will need to reduce the number T1 or E1 Timeslots Channels DSOs being packetized so that packet traffic does not exceed the bandwidth of the functioning LAN link The ProtectorChannels command configures the number of channels that are packetized when only one connection is fully functional T1 E1 ProtectorChannels FULL NN XX NN Y Z MM Y Z ProtectorChannels designates the channels transmitted and received during AltProtector failover Channels can be specified Full a start channel and number of channels NN XX a single channel NN or MM or a range of channels Y Z Single channels and ranges of channels are separated by commas and can be combined Example Assume each LAN Port has enough
83. NPORT Protector The Protector monitors incoming packets for link quality over a period of time The period of time is specified by Tube Protector PollingPeriod Incoming packets are monitored for percentage of expected packets actually received the number of packets received out of sequence the number of times the serial transmit buffer overflows and the number of times the serial transmit buffer under runs The threshold for each are independently configured If any are exceeded during a PollingPe riod the Protector fails over to LAN2 TUBE PROTECTOR QUALIFICATION NN The range is from 30 to 255 seconds Qualification is the number of seconds the Protector needs a good LAN1 based on RxOutOfSequence RxPacketPercent TxDrainDrops TxUnderruns before it will switch back to LAN1 This is useful only for reporting purposes as in which LAN the Protec tor thinks has good packets Otherwise Enhanced Mode is transmitting on both LANs and receiving packets from both LANs effectively without descrimination TUBE PROTECTOR TRANSMITTER ON OFF Tuming Transmitter OFF is for use with simplex applications such as one way satellite broadcasts TUBE PROTECTOR RECEIVER ON OFF Turning Receiver OFF prevents the reception of Tube packets This should only be used on simplex circuits at the trasmit side TUBE PROTECTOR HARDSWITCH ON OFF The Protector will transmit on LAN2 only when LAN1 has failed HardSwitch should be set Off for Enhan
84. NUMBER OF CHANNELS E1 Channels Fractional 1 8 Slave Unit config Host Contact TestUnit Host Location TestPlace IP Default 198 168 2 50 Telnet On User Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 2 51 IP Default 192 168 2 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 2 51 IP Default 192 168 2 50 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 40 62 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 E1 Data E1 Clocking E1 Framing E1 Coding E1 IdleCharacter E1 Channels Interface S2 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Normal V2PLL CRC4 HDB3 Ox7f START CHANNEL NUMBER OF CHANNELS Fractional 1 8 Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 40 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 E1 Data E1 Clocking E1 Framing E1 Coding E1 IdleCharacter E1 Channels Normal V2
85. Off IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 2 51 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface S1 Type RS 530 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name 99 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 32 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 32 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 1024 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S2 Type RS 530 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 32 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 32 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 0
86. OffEchoChannels Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 96 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full T1 EchoCanceller On T1 Signaling None T1 Off choChannels Example 11 IP Tube RS530 Video IP Tube RS530 V 35 configurations are detailed in this section The command line configuration listing is shown for each example The configuration commands are defined in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface as well as in a detailed discussion provided in Chapter 7 P TubeRS530 V35 Configuration amp Operation Scenario This sample configuration details the interconnection of a synchronous serial Video Encoder to a Video De coder via IP Tube RS530 s that are providing smooth clocking at a rate of 1 536 Megabits per second The IP Tube s Ethernet interconnection has a committed information rate that is much greater than the IP Tube s maximum data rate Therefore the Ethernet bandwidth available is relatively unlimited The Tube Clock on one of the IP Tube RS530 s need to be set to Interna
87. P address has been assigned to the IP Tube Ethernet interface the user can telnet into the IP Tube from anywhere on the local network and continue configuration using the Command Line Interface Editing amp Pasting Configurations Users of the Command Line Interface CLI have the option of editing standard IP Tube configura tions in a text editor and pasting that configuration to the IP Tube The examples in Chapter 4 Config uration Examples can be used as templates and include a variety of the most common configurations Edit the desired configuration listing using a simple text editor then connect to the IP Tube through Telnet or the Console port and enter the configuration mode with the command config Paste the edited text comments and all to the IP Tube then issue the command save IP Tube will reset and come up with the new configuration To save an IP Tube configuration issue the command show configuration all and save the re sponse listing to a text file Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide IP Tube Cabling The IP Tube DLT1 DLE1 and the GT1 GE1 models use standard 10 100BaseT Ethernet cabling to connect to an Ethernet switch or hub A crossover 10 100BaseT cable can be used for direct connec tion to a single router wireless radio or other Ethernet device The cabling used to connect the IP Tube T1 E1 Port to the T1 E1 interface to be extended depends upon whether it is connecting to T1 E1 equipment PB
88. P packets for transmission over Ethernet The RS530 interface is provided via a 25 pin D connector on the rear panel See the Appendices for pinouts signal names and directions The RS530 interface on the IP Tube is configurable as a Data Communication Equipment DCE interface or as a Data Terminal Equipment DTE interface As a DCE it provides TxClk and RxCIk to the connected DTE The DCE model must have a configured data rate through the IP Tube RS530 by setting timing pa rameters which control the TxClk and RxClk The size and frequency of the IP packets can be con trolled yielding data rates ranging from 8 Kbits sec to 1 544 Mbits sec Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530DL RS530HS RS232 X 21 V35 and IP Tube SER RS530 RS232 V35 provides an explanation of the commands and their effect RS232 Interface The IP Tube RS232 model provides a standard RS232 synchronous serial interface for connection to Data Terminal Equipment DTE or Data Communication Equipment DCE such as Encrypters Terminal Servers Video Codecs and WAN Routers The IP Tube RS232 encapsulates the serial data into IP packets for transmission over Ethernet The RS232 interface is provided via a 25 pin D connector on the rear panel See the Appendices for 14 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide pinouts signal names and directions The RS232 interface on the IP Tube can be ordered as a Data Communication Equipment DCE inte
89. PLL CRC4 HDB3 Ox7f START CHANNEL NUMBER OF CHANNELS Fractional 1 8 Example 3 DLT1 C Dual LAN Ports with Compression Scenario e with 2 LAN ports and 2 Serial ports both serial ports are configured to use LAN1 serial port set to TYPE T1 with Compression e noecho cancellation SNMP is turned off autonegotiation is turned on thereby eliminating the need to set duplex and speed pa rameters e Telnet is turned on so the administrator can access the IP Tube unit remotely via the network BroadcastRCV is turned on for both LAN ports 63 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide serial ports are set to T1Framed to coincide with the T1 circuits or CSU DSU s that are connected to these ports e of Service is set to it s highest priority 8 e Buffers are set to 20 packets and Frames Per Packet are set to 56 on both serial ports see the Appendix for the timing this configuration derives Master clocking is set to network so the unit will derive it s timing from the T1 the T1 s parameters are configured to match the incoming Full T1 s Master Unit config Host Contact TestUnit Host Location TestLab IP Default 192 168 1 1 Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 This IP address is the factory default You will need to enter your IP address
90. PLL CSU 0 ESF B8ZS Ox7f Full On None T1 Off choChannels Example 5 DLT1 C Dual LAN Ports Two Active T1 Ports Internal Clocking with Compression and Assured Delivery Protocol Scenario e With 2 LAN ports and 2 Serial ports both serial ports are configured to use LAN1 e Internal Clocking serial port set to TYPE T1 e protocol is set to Assured Delivery ADP with Compression e Echo Cancellation SNMP is turned off autonegotiation is turned on Telnet is turned on BroadcastRCV is turned on for both LAN ports the serial ports are set to T1Framed to coincide with the T1 circuits or CSU DSU s that are connected to these ports of Service is set to it s highest priority 8 e Buffers are set to 20 packets and Frames Per Packet are set to 56 on both serial ports see the Appendix for the timing this configuration derives Master clocking is set to Internal so the unit will derive it s timing internally the T1 s parameters are configured to match the incoming Full T1 s 70 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Master Unit config Host Contact Engage Host Location TubeLab IP Default 192 168 1 50 Telnet On User Timeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Default 000 000 000 000 default router is set at the system level Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Au
91. PORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL 55 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 2 T1 ports Interface S3 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 3 T1 ports Interface S4 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF 56 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter
92. PP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter 7F Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 3 E1 ports Interface S4 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter 7F Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 E1 ports Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide IPTube B E1IPTube Example CO int Host Name IPTube B Host Location Site B Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 51 24 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp O
93. PP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability Off Tube Compression Off Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off Interface S2 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Ox7F E1 Channels Full Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 2 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off 87 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off Interface S3 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Ox7F E1 Channels Full Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off Interface S4 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Ox7F E1 Channels Full Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Dup
94. PTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS OxB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S3 Type V 35 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 51 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3277 Tube 2 TOS 0xB8 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 115 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide Interface S4 Type V 35 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig O
95. RS is set to 4 then a 6 msec one way or 12 msec roundtrip delay is introduced The user should also take into account the latency or delay introduced by the LAN WAN interconnect to determine total delay IP Packet Encapsulation Overhead The encapsulation of T1 E1 data into IP UDP packets for transmission over Ethernet adds overhead due to the Ethernet IP and UDP headers a total of 44 bytes This 44 byte overhead should be taken into account when considering Ethernet bandwidth utilization Notes e ADSO is a 64 Kbps Voice Data circuit e AFull T1 circuit is configured for 24 DSO s The T1 signal is divided into frames with one byte 8 bits allocated for each configured DSO and 1 framing bit for a total of 193 bits per frame 24 x 8 1 A Full E1 circuit is configured for 31 DSO s The E1 signal is divided into frames with one byte 8 bits allocated for each configured DSO and 1 framing signalling byte 8 bits for a total of 32 bytes or 256 bits per frame The Tube FPP setting controls the number of T1 E1 data frames to be encapsulated in a single IP UDP packet If an IP Tube E1 is configured for Full E1 and FPP 1 then the IP packet transmitted out the Ethernet interface will contain 256 bits 32 bytes of E1 data and 44 bytes of header informa 169 Chapter 6 P Tube DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 UNO G4 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide tion This is an inefficient use o
96. Recovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 1 T1 port Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 2 T1 ports Interface S3 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 53 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 3 T1 ports Interface S4 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Dest
97. SCRCLOCK FACTOR NN TUBE SCRCLOCK FACTOR NN NN is the number that multiplies the mode NX2K4 NX56K AND NX64K INTERVAL xx Note Tube Interval was used in legacy equipment and is left here for informational purposes It is recommended that Tube Interval be set to 0 The IP Tube Interval command is used to control the gapping of the transmit SCT and receive SCR clocks Permitted values are 0 to 63 An Interval of 0 does not gap the clock An Interval consists of the period defined by the Frames Per Packet times the Bytes Per Frame times the bits per byte divided by the SCxCLOCK setting The Bytes Per Frame is set to 64 The FPP is user configu rable and the bits per byte is 8 TUBE INTERVAL is used to regulate the packet rate Regulation of the packet rate provides for a mechanism to control the data rate of the IPe Tube RS530 V 35 The Interval setting can be utilized to clock data out of the DTE into a packet at its maximum clocking rate so as to minimize latency There are 2 methods of controlling the IP Tube data rate One method is to set the SCxCLOCK rates to the data rate required This method can double the delay if in the IP Tube network connection is WAN link The other method is to set the SCxCLOCK to the DTE s maximum clocking rate and regu late the packet rate with the Interval setting For an example on how to configure Tube Interval the user will select Frames Per Packet 10 With this TUBE FPP setti
98. SS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 8 Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses a md5crypt c md5crypt h THE BEER WARE LICENSE Revision 42 lt phk login dknet dk gt wrote this file As long as you retain this notice you can do whatever you want with this stuff If we meet some day and you think this stuff is worth it you can buy me a beer in return Poul Henning Kamp b snprintf replacement Copyright Patrick Powell 1995 This code is based on code written by Patrick Powell papowell astart com It may be used for any purpose as long as this notice remains intact on all source code distributions c Compatibility code openbsd compat 230 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Apart from the previously mentioned licenses various pieces o
99. SSH host key The text of a key generated by client software can be used as the OpenSSH DSA Key in the SSHD HostKey Enter command Note When creating a key do not enter a pass phrase Note There will be two keys generated when creating a key use the file without the pub extension Example OpenSSH provides the sys keygen program Run ssh keygen b 1024 t dsa f filename Ssy keygen creates a private key in filename and a public key in filename pub Enter the text of the private key as the lt OpenSSH DSA Key in the SSHD HostKey Enter command SecureCRT can create an OpenSSH format private key In the tools menu select Create Public Key Execute the Key Generation wizard to create a client key the client key can be used as a host key Choose type DSA and 1024 bits Select OpenSSH format when it saves the private key in a file Used the saved file as the input to the SSHD HostKey Enter command Changing a host key can have repercussions amongst clients The next time they connect to the server they may prompt the user if they want to continue even though the Server key has changed or refuse the connection entirely Troubleshooting SSHD If an SSH client cannot make a connection to the IPTube check the following items Make sure the SSHD is configured on Check the SSHD Port number is the same as the Client attempting the connection Look at the Show SSHD Info status Check if SSHD is On or there is already a sessi
100. SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence 235 Appendices Glossary Terms and Concepts Before using the Engage IP Tube you should be familiar with the terms and concepts that describe TCP IP Networking and T1 E1 Telecommunications General Networking Terms Network A network is a collection of computers server devices and communication devices connected to gether and capable of communication with one another through a transmission medium Internet An internet is any grouping of two or more networks connected by one or more internet routers Network Services Network services are the capabilities that the network system delivers to users such as print servers file servers and electronic mail Addresses Transmitting information in a network system is made possible by an addressing scheme that identi fies the sender and destination of the transmission using network and node addresses Data is trans mitted to and from these addresses in the form of packets Routing Table A routing table is maintained in each router This table lists all networks and routers in the internet and enables routers to determine the most efficient route for each packet The routing table serves as a logical map of the i
101. Servers Video Codecs and WAN Routers into IP packets The IP connection provides for a transparent interconnection of DTEs and DCEs via LANs WANs MANs Satellite and Wireless Ethernet The size and frequency of the IP packets can be controlled yielding efficient data rates ranging from 2 4 Kbits sec to 16 Mbits sec Some models of the IP Tube may include features such as Compression and Echo Cancellation ECAN Features can be utilized to make the data stream more secure ADP produce trouble shooting information SNMP Traps provide redundant connections Protector and Switch options and other advantages The following IP Tube models are equipped with built in data compression P Tube DLT1 C P Tube DLE1 C P Tube GT1 C P Tube GET C This lossless data compression can greatly reduce bandwidth usage over the IP connection particu larly during periods of idle traffic yielding reductions in bandwidth utilization as great as 56 to 1 The compression ratio is based upon the frames per packet setting of the IP Tube s T1 E1 interface The available compression ratios for each of the models is as follows P Tube DLT1 C 8 1 to 56 1 P Tube DLE1 C 8 1 to 40 1 P Tube GT1 C 8 1 to 56 1 Engage Communication User s Guide P Tube GE1 C 8 1 to 40 1 For interoperability with the IP gt Tube DLT1 C and IP Tube DLE1 C models the IP Tube GT1 C GE1 C models must match the fra
102. Switch if forced ON for IP Tube T3 and E3 products HardSwitch OFF is not supported RxOutOfSequence TxDrainDrops and TxUnderruns are not supported as failover criteria for T3 and E3 products Hardswitch On can be used in cases where the failover LAN2 path is a Bill On Demand circuit and connection time is to be kept to a minimum Hardswitch Off can be used is cases where network bandwidth and cost is not an issue TUBE PROTECTOR ENHANCED MODE ON OFF Enhanced Mode optional is designed to accommodate the packet arrival delay that can occur be tween LAN1 and LAN2 packet networks Buffering is added to the faster path so that packet loss on one link is replaced with a packet from the other link without a fault TUBE PROTECTOR TRANSMITTER ON OFF Turning Transmitter OFF on the receive side only is for use with simplex applications such as one way satellite broadcasts TUBE PROTECTOR RECEIVER ON OFF Turning Receiver OFF prevents the reception of Tube packets This should only be used on simplex circuits at the trasmit side TUBE PROTECTOR POLLINGPERIOD NN PollingPeriod determines the length of time the Protector evaluates the failover criteria RxOutOfSe quence RxPacketPercent TxDrainDrops and TxUnderruns If during a PollingPeriod any of the failover criteria does not meet their configured values the Protector fails over to LAN2 Setting a lower value of PollingPeriod shortens the time to fail over to LAN2 in the event of a
103. T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter 0x7f T1 Channels Full Note In some cases the parameter is noted as a capability This is an indication that the unit was shipped without that particular feature Contact Engage Sales for upgrades BroadcastRCV can be turned On and ARP turned Off as long as the IP address is entered as a MAC address Example 2 Scenario DLE1 Dual 10 100BaseT Fractional E1 with 2 LAN ports and 2 Serial ports both serial ports are set to TYPE E1 no compression or echo cancellation capabilities SNMP is turned off autonegotiation is turned on thereby eliminating the need to set duplex and speed pa rameters Telnet is turned on so the administrator can access the IP Tube unit remotely via the network BroadcastRCV is turned on for both LAN ports no looping is turned on the serial ports are set to Transparent framing must be Transparent when using a frac tional E1 or T1 Type of Service is set to it s highest priority 8 Buffers are set to 20 packets and Frames Per Packet are set to 40 on both serial ports see the appendix for the timing this configuration derives Master clocking is set to network so the unit will derive it s timing from the E1 the E1 s are configured to match the incoming E1 circuits 60 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Master Unit config Host Con
104. TA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES The 32 bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack c was contributed by CORE SDI S A under a BSD style license Cryptographic attack detector for ssh source code Copyright c 1998 CORE SDI S A Buenos Aires Argentina All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that this copyright notice is retained THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S A BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MISUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE Ariel Futoransky lt futo core sdi com gt lt http www core sdi com gt 227 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide 3 ssh keyscan was contributed by David Mazieres under a BSD style license Copyright 1995 1996 by David Mazieres lt dm lcs mit edu gt Modification and redistribution in source and binary forms is permitted provided that due credit is given to the author and the OpenBSD project by leaving this copyright notice intact 4 The Rijndael implementation by Vincent Rijmen Antoon Bossel
105. TFTP server may need to be disabled to permit TFTP sessions initiated from the Engage unit Upgrade by issuing the command upgrade tftp server addr upgrade filename a Example upgrade 192 168 1 1 26 72 82 upgrade upg Notes a When the upgrade is complete the Engage unit will reboot causing a Telnet connection to drop If this does occur simply re establish the Telnet connection b Upgrades which enable optional features additional Ports Compression Protector etc cause the Engage unit to revert to Base firmware Any system software upgrades must be re installed Engage Communication Inc Upgrade Procedure page 1 of 1 Table 15 Engage Flash Upgrade Instructions 224 Appendices Engage Communication 1 tion Xupgrade of Engage IP Tube IP Express BlackBond and BlackDoor Systems General This document outlines the procedure for xupgrading Engage IP Tube IP Express BlackBond and BlackDoor system hardware This is to upgrade the system CPLD not the system software Procedure The xupgrade requires a local TFTP trivial file transfer protocol server Shareware TFTP servers are available online including http www klever net kin oumpkin html 2 Obtain the xupgrade file and unzip password if required from Engage Communication Technical Support tel 1 831 688 1021 or support engageinc com 3 Place the xsvf file in the appropriate directory on TFTP server 4 Ensure IP connectivit
106. Tube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 3 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Hex Tube Duplicates 0 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Tube SequenceRecovery Off T3 Clocking PLL 193 Chapter 9 IP Tube Configuration and Operation Chapter 10 IP Tube Configuration amp Operation This chapter provides operational theory and configuration details specific to the IP Tube model with Firmware Version 64 72 xx To verify Firmware Version login to unit and type show router IP Tube Installation Steps The process of installing an IP Tube involves the following steps Planning for the IP Tube interconnect e Installing the IP Tube hardware e Configuring System and Ethernet parameters e Configuring the IP Tube interface parameters Making Ethernet and E3 cabling connections e Verifying IP Tube connectivity System and Ethernet Parameters The IPTube s System parameters and LAN interface configuration items are described in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface for specific syntax requirements This portion of the manual is dedicated to the installation parameters associated with the E3 interface E3 Parameters The IP Tube does not have any related configuration parameters All the data bits of the are put transparently into the Tube s IP packets The IPTubeE3 supports all E3 Framing and Coding c
107. USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Some code is licensed under an ISC style license to the following copyright holders Internet Software Consortium Todd C Miller 231 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Reyk Floeter Chad Mynhier Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND TODD C MILLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL TODD C MILLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Some code is licensed under a MIT style license to the following copyright holders Free Software Foundation Inc Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a
108. UnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 E1 ports Example C DLT1 Generic providing 10mS Delay T1 IPTube Example C with alternate Buffer and FPP settings e Can be used to configure 1 to 4 T1 ports Basic configuration Tube Buffers 5 and FPP 16 give 10 mS delay T1IP Tube Unit A config interface Host Name IPTube A Host Location Site A Telnet On UserTimeout Off 37 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 50 24 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 1 T1 port Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube C
109. X Phone System Multiplexor or directly to a T1 E1 line In the case of a connection to the T1 E1 interface of T1 E1 equipment a crossover cable is required The IP TubeT1 E1 is shipped with a T1 E1 Crossover Cable that uses yellow cabling Refer to the Appendices for the details of the wiring of this cable Connections to T1 E1 lines are made with a standard straight through T1 E1 cable IPeTube Configuration Parameters The setup of the IP Tube involves configuration of the following P Tube System Parameters P Tube Data Conversion Parameters Interface Specific parameters Examples are provided in Chapter 4 Configuration Examples and a complete description of all com mands is available in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface IP Tube System Parameters System parameters include the IP Tube Hostname the Ethernet IP address and the default router Examples Host Name AptosTube Note Provide a unique name for the IP Tube Ethernet IP address IP ADDRESS aaa bbb ccc ddd ee The IP address is applied on a per interface basis Ethernet Broadcast Reception The Ethernet interface can be configured to disable the reception of Broadcast and Multicast packets The IP protocol uses broadcast packets to resolve the Ethernet MAC Address of the destination IP If BroadcastRCV is set to Off the Tube Ether ARP and Tube Ethernet Address need to be configured with the MAC address BroadcastRCV ON OFF Note The Destination IP Tub
110. ace S4 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 T1 ports IPTube B T1 Clocking Internal Example co int Host Name IPTube B Host Location Site B Telnet On 49 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 51 24 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 1 T1 port Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTub
111. adable must be ordered at time of purchase E1 OFFECHOCHANNELS ALL NONE NN XX Y Z MM Y Z Indicates on which channels echo cancellation is disabled ALL disables all channels echo cancellation NONE enables all channels echo cancellation To selectively disable individual channels NN is the start channel and XX is the number of channels to be disabled Alternatively NN and MM are single channels to be disabled and Y Z are a range of channles to be disabled Single channels and ranges are separated by commas and can be com bined on a command line Alternatively for channels in use that are not contiguous NN and MM are single E1 channels in use and Y Z are a range of E1 channels in use Single channels and ranges are separated by commas and can be combined on a command line For example an ISDN PRI link uses channel 31 for D Channel signaling thus one would want to dis able channel 31 for echo cancellation E1 OFFECHOCHANNELS 31 155 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide RS530 RS232 X 21 amp V 35 Interface The following Serial Interface commands are applicable to models connecting to RS530 V 35 X 21 and RS232 interfaces TYPE RS530 RS232 V 35 RS232 The TYPE parameter is factory configured to match the Serial port s hardware X 21 is supported us ing an RS530 to X 21 cable Note When Tube RemoteLoop is on DCD becomes inactive
112. aers and Paulo Barreto is in the public domain and distributed with the following license Q version 3 0 December 2000 Optimised ANSI C code for the Rijndael cipher now AES gy author Vincent Rijmen lt vincent riimen esat kuleuven ac be gt gy author Antoon Bosselaers lt antoon bosselaers esat kuleuven ac be gt gy author Paulo Barreto lt paulo barreto terra com br gt This code is hereby placed in the public domain THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 5 One component of the ssh source code is under a 3 clause BSD license held by the University of California since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley code Copyright c 1983 1990 1992 1993 1995 The Regents of the University of California Al
113. ain 64 bytes of data relatively small packets The user should consider that encapsulation of RS530 RS232 V 35 data into IP packets adds over head due to the MAC IP and UDP headers a total of 44 bytes This 44 byte overhead should be taken into account when considering Ethernet data rate The greater the FPP the less the effect of this overhead In many cases it is necessary to limit the rate at which the IP Tube transmits data on to Ethernet Table 1 shows the overhead which results from various FPP settings Formula Overhead FPP 64 44 FPP 64 Use table 3 to calculate the overhead contributed by the encapsulation of data into IP packets From this the user can determine an appropriate rate at which data should be clocked out of the DTE Ethernet IP FPP 7 Overhead Ratio Serial Data Bytes Packet Size Ethernet Serial Bytes Setting Table 3 Overhead resulting from various FPP configurations 179 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide Data Rates Ethernet Data Rate Example If the desired data rate on the Ethernet LAN is 256 Kbps and the user has configured FPP to 12 then the rate at which serial data should be clocked out of the DTE is 256 1 057 242 Kbps RS 530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Data Rate Example Alternatively if the data rate on the serial interface is
114. al ports are set to T1Framed to coincide with the T1 circuits or CSU DSU s that are connected to these ports of Service is set to it s highest priority 8 Buffers are set to 5 packets and Frames Per Packet are set to 16 on both serial ports see the appendix for the timing this configuration derives e Master clocking is set to Network so the unit will derive it s timing from the T1 circuit e the T1 s are configured to match the incoming T1 s parameters Master Unit config Host Contact TestTube Host Location Test Environment IP Default 192 168 1 50 Telnet On User Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Def Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 52 24 IP Def Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube 94 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 2 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability On Tube Compression On Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery On T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full T1 EchoCanceller On T1 Signaling None T1 OffEchoChannels
115. aming T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 53 74 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability Off Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery On T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Interface S3 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On 75 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube SequenceRecovery Off Interface S4 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS
116. an the clock rate of 44 736 Megabits of the Packet network IP Tube Cabling LAN The IP Tubes use standard 10 100BaseT Ethernet cabling to connect to an Ethernet switch T3 The T3 uses 75 ohm coaxial connectors for the Transmit and Receive signals Transmit is the ouput and Receive is the input 188 Chapter 9 IP Tube Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide T3 Status LEDs In addition to the standard LEDs for the serial interface there are three additional LEDs for the T3 ALOS Analog Loss of Signal When the incoming T3 signal falls below the acceptable threshold level DLOS Digital Loss of Signal Occurs when a string of 175 consecutive zeros occur on the line RLOL Receive Loss of Lock When the receiver has detected a loss of lock condition 189 Chapter 9 IP Tube Configuration and Operation Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide T3 EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION Firmware 64 72 xx UNIT 1 IP Default router 255 255 255 255 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 2 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomai
117. ange from 0x00 to 0x08 Note Tube TOS is displayed in hex Preceding the entry with Ox results in a direct hexidecimal input Example TUBE TOS 0x08 Note It is possible to set the Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP field using the TOS value The Differentiated Services DiffServ uses the same byte in the IP Header as the TOS The 6 MSB of the TOS byte are the same bits used for setting the DSCP value To enter the Expedited Forwarding EF DSCP value enter the following hex value in the TOS field 0xB8 This will mark these packets as EF Intermediary routers and switches can be configured for Quality of Service prioritization to ensure that IP Tube packets receive highest priority as they are routed through the IP interconnect This QoS could be configured based on the IP Tube Ethernet IP addresses but a more straightforward method makes use of the unique UDP port number Communication between IP Tube systems uses packets destined for UDP port number 3175 This registered port assignment reference www iana org assignments port numbers allows QoS con figuration to prioritize UPD packets destined for port 3175 This prioritization is essential for voice and other traffic which is sensitive to latency and delay on the LAN WAN interconnection 168 Chapter 6 P Tube DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 UNO G4 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide Latency and Bandwidth Considerations The IP Tube
118. apter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability Off Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet ARP On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Will get timing from the T1 connected to this unit making this unit the Master Clocking unit T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full T1 EchoCanceller On T1 Signaling None T1 Off choChannels Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full T1 EchoCanceller On T1 Signaling None T1 Off choChannels 68 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Slave Unit config Host Contact TestSlave Host Location Remote TestLab2 IP Default 00
119. are e Configuring System and Ethernet parameters e Configuring the IP Tube interface parameters Making Ethernet and T1 E1 cabling connections e Verifying IP Tube connectivity Note A T1 E1 crossover cable is typically required to connect the IP Tube T1 E1 interface to the ex ternal T1 E1 equipment Direct connections to T1 E1 lines use straight T1 E1 cables System and Ethernet Parameters The IPTube s System parameters and LAN interface configuration items are described in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface for specific syntax requirements This portion of the manual is dedicated to the installation parameters associated with the T1 and E1 interfaces T1 Parameters T1 interface commands are configured by first selecting INTERFACE S1 these ports are marked on the IP Tube as Tel1 Tel2 Tel3 Tel4 INT S1 The IP Tube is enabled with the command TUBE On TUBE ON OFF Tube Framing is configured for T1 Framed or Transparent e 1 Framed encapsulates the T1 signaling and framing bits along with the T1 DSO data The selection of the T1 DSOs starting channel and number of channels is setup by the Serial Interface s T1 configuration commands e Transparent framing encapsulates the DSO data without the T1 framing and signaling bits Examples TUBE FRAMING T1 FRAMED TUBE FRAMING TRANSPARENT IP Tube destination address is set to the IP address of the receiving IP Tube Note Loopback of the T1 occurs when the destinati
120. ather than turning Green Green indicates reception of T1 E1 frames from the T1 E1 Equipment attached to Port 1 s T1 1 E1 1 interface that matches the T1 E1 framing protocol configuration of IP Tube T1 ESF or D4 E1 CRC4 or FAS Port 1 will turn green independent of the configuration of the network parameters and whether the number of DSOs match es E1 requires that the line coding match also E1 HDB3 line coding is recommended Proceed through the following steps in sequence IP Tube Cabling The cabling that is used to connect the IP Tubes depends upon whether it is connecting to equipment or directly to a T1 E1 line In the case of a connection to the T1 E1 interface of T1 E1 Equipment a T1 E1 cross over cable is required For E1 connections the cross over cable is used between the RJ45 connector on the IPTube and the RJ45 to DB15 Male adapter Refer to the Appendices for the details of the wiring of this cable Connections to a T1 E1 line is done with a standard RJ45 cable 8 straight 1 to 1 Interface S1 Configuration Interface 51 TEL 1 must have its Type set to T1 or E1 Tube On Protocol set to IPTube IP Tube T1 Interface Framing 202 Port 1 Green indicates reception of T1 E1 frames from the T1 E1 Equipment attached to Port 1 s T1 E1 interface that matches the T1 E1 framing protocol configuration of IP Tube 1 ESF or D4 E1 CRC4 or FAS and E1 Coding HDB3 or AMI Port 1 will turn green independent of the configu
121. bandwidth for a half T1 or 12 channels With AltProtector the IPTube T1 Channels is configured as Full since the T1 load is split evenly two LAN ports If the 139 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide AltProtector fails over to a single LAN T1 ProtectorChannels limits it to only 12 channels thus not exceeding the bandwidth of the functional LAN Connection Tube LANPort AltProtector T1 Channels Full T1 ProtectorChannels 1 12 TUBE PACKET Configuration TUBE ADDRESS addr Used to configure the destination IP address of the remote IP Tube Note If the TUBE ADDRESS is configured with the same IP address as the IP Tube Ethernet inter face LAN1 a loopback of the T1 over IP port S1 will occur TUBE LAN1 LAN2 DESTINATION addr Used to configure the destination IP address of the remote IP Tube in conjunction with the LAN LAN2 specifier which indicates the Ethernet interface for this destination IP address Note for the Enhanced Protector the capability has been given to allow an IP Tube to both receive and transmit a multicast stream This requires that tube 1 destination be indentically configured with the same IP multicast address on both the transmitting Tube and on all receiver Tubes The Receiv ing IPTubes use the Multicast address to configure their Ether receiver Multicast Example tube 1 destination 224 0 0 1 TUBE ETHERNET ARP ON OFF TUBE ETHERNET ARP OFF uses the
122. be Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 51 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3278 Tube 2 TOS 0xB8 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 1024 Tube Duplicates 0 Example 14 IP Tube SER RS2323 Master Unit Config for IP Tube SER RS530 DCE Internal Clocking int co 104 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Host Contact No contact specified Host Location No location specified OurDNSServer IP Default router 255 255 255 255 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off SSHD Off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 2 51 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface S1 Type RS 232 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off 105 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Remoteloop Of
123. be NN Note Tube FPP must be a number that divides by 8 when MUX is ON Note if the T1 or E1 interface is using PLL clocking this command enables a Tube to lock on to the data rate of the specified DSO group number tube S1 NN for all Tube streams for this interface Note Copying and Pasting a configuration for a unit currently doesn t work Please follow the steps below to create a script that can be Pasted to create the MUX subinterfaces ADDTUBE XX YY Creates a DSO group with its own protocol and Tube parameters with the starting DSO at XX and number of DSOs of YY Note This command may only be used if Tube Mux is on and if a Tube is currently not being select ed A Tube is created with its own parameters including buffers frames per packet and destination IP address The channels specified may not overlap with an existing multiplexed Tube TUBE S1 1 1 2 S1 x Specify the Tube for the Tube specific configure commands TUBE with no parameter clears the Tube setting Note When entering into MUX subinterface using Tube 1 2 currently there is no change in the command line to note you are in the subinterface It will only show IP Tube S1 Note Tube LAN1 Destination doesn t presently work for entering in IP Address please use Tube Address to properly enter the IP Address value into the configuration Example interface s1 t1 clocking pll tube mux on tube mux plltube 1 addtube 1 2 addtube 3 2 add
124. be On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full 41 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide copy to here for 3 T1 ports Interface S4 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter OxTf T1 TxUnderrunAIS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 T1 ports E1 IPTube Example Can be used to configure 1 to 4 E1 ports Basic configuration Tube Buffers 5 and FPP 12 gives 7 5 mS delay IPTubeA E1IPTube Example CO int Host Name IPTube A Host Location Site A Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On 42 Chapter 4 Configuration Exa
125. calloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 2 E1 ports Interface S3 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On 36 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 3 E1 ports Interface S4 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Hex E1 Tx
126. card the new configuration RESET Resets the IP Tube HELP HELP ALL CONFIG SHOW Provides Help information on a selected list of topics Typing HELP with no argument provides the Help summary screen which is the top level list of commands CLEAR LAN1 LAN2 S1 S2 All Clears the port statistics on the selected port Ethernet LAN Port 1 etc For the IP Tube GT1 GE1 use the command CLEAR LAN1 LAN2 S1 S2 S3 S4 All 125 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide HOST NAME namestring Provide a unique name for the IP Tube The new host name does not take effect until a save and reset is performed Example HOST NAME Aptos IPTube Note Earlier versions of the Engage software use the term ROUTER NAME TELNET ON OFF Turns the ability to telnet into a Tube unit On and Off USER TIMEOUT Off 1 60 This setting can be turned Off or set to the number of minutes you can leave your console or telnet session idle before the system automatically logs you out If logged off you must simply log on again Note Setting this value to Off or zero disables automatic user logout TERM NN Allows the user to tailor the number of display lines to their terminal screen size IP DEFAULT ROUTER address Configures the IP address of the default router or gateway for this Unit This default router is the system s default router and is used when a specific interface is not set to a hi
127. cation User s Guide T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 T1 ports Clocking Network Example Site A IPTube is clocking Network Site B IPTube is clocking V2PLL The Site A IPTube is sourcing the clock from the T1 line The Site B IPTube is recovering the clock from the Site A IPTube The site 1 is providing clock and the Site B T1 is receiving clock This would be used in a scenario where one piece of equipment external to the IPTube is providing clock This is a T1 configuration The T1 Clocking parameter in this example would apply to an E1 configuration as well IPTubeA 1 Clocking Network Example config interface Host Name IPTube A Host Location Site A Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 50 24 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 52 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube Sequence
128. cation IP Tube User s Guide Switch Commands PASSTHRU ON OFF Passthru OFF results in normal IP Tube operation Passthru ON switches the S1 port directly to the S2 port There is no T1 E1 over IP S1 T1 E1 PASSTHRUCLOCK NETWORK INTERNAL TEL2 PassThruClock detefmines the Clocking for a Serial interface when Passthru is ON When Passthru is OFF the Clocking for a Serial interface is determined by the T1 E1 Clock setting Configure T1 E1 Passthruclock in the following manner Clock Master Connected to the S1 Interface Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock Network Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock Internal Clock Master Connected to the 52 Interface or the S1 Interface of a Remote IP Tube Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock TEL2 Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock Network IP Tube as Clock Master Local IP Tube Master Clocking Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock TEL2 Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock Internal Remote IP Tube Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock TEL2 Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock Network 161 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Link Protector Commands PASSTHRU PROTECTIVE LINKPROTECTOR MANUAL When Passthru Protective is MANUAL the Link Protector operates in the manner of the T1 E1 Switch Option Switching between the S2 port and T1 E1 over IP is acheived with PassThru On or Off When Passthru Protective is LINKPROTECTOR the LinkProtector option is enabled Swit
129. ced Mode On This ensures the IPTube transmits on both LAN1 and LAN2 Note Tube Protector HardSwitch if forced ON for IP Tube T3 and E3 products HardSwitch OFF is not supported Also RxOutOfSequence TxDrainDrops and TxUnderruns are not supported as failover criteria for T3 and E3 products Note Protector HardSwitch On does not make sense for ENHANCED MODE because then the Pro tector will transmit on LAN2 only when LAN1 has failed 137 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide TUBE PROTECTOR POLLINGPERIOD NN PollingPeriod is the period in seconds in which the Protector evaluates received packets out of se quence received packet percentage transmit drain drops and transmit underruns for thresholds of the configuration values set below to determine whether to fail over to LAN2 PollingPeriod is a Pro tector configuration parameter is not relevant when both Protector is configured to utilize both LAN1 and LAN2 in a fully redundant mode such as Enhanced Mode TUBE PROTECTOR RxOutOfSequence NN Defines the number of Receive Out Of Sequence packets encountered during the polling period to cause a switch TUBE PROTECTOR RxPacketPercent NN Defines the number of Receive Packet Percentage during the polling period to cause a switch TUBE PROTECTOR TxDrainDrops NN Defines the number of Transmit Drain Drops encountered during the polling period to cause a switch TUBE PROTECTOR TxUnder
130. ch system provides two 10 100BaseT interfaces for connec tion to an Ethernet switch or hub using a straight thru Ethernet cable For direct connection to a PC or other LAN device the user should obtain a 10 100BaseT crossover cable The IP Tube UNO use a 10 100BaseT to connect to the Local Area Network Same as described above with the exception that the UNO has a single Local Area Network port The IP Tube G4 use a 10 100BaseT switch to connect to the Local Area Network Each system provides a total of five ports Four of which are connected together as a switch LAN1 ETH1 ETH3 ETH5 and the remaining one is a standalone port LAN2 ETH2 This product has Auto MDI MDIX Crossover sensing and will determine whether or not it needs to interchange cable sense between pairs so that an external crossover cable is not required 10 100BaseT Ethernet cabling and crossover pinouts are provided in the Appendices 13 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide IP Tube Serial Interface Options T1 fractional T1 Interface The internal T1 fracT1 interfaces S1 S2 S3 or S4 are used for T1 over IP connectivity The interface connects to the T1 interface of T1 based telecommunication equipment such as a PBX ora T1 Multiplexer This connection uses a panel RJ48 jack and accepts 8 pin modular plugs T1 fracT1 circuits use pins 1 amp 2 for RxData and 4 amp 5 for TxData See Appendices for the T1 interface pinou
131. ching between the S2 port and T1 E1 over IP is automatic PASSTHRU PROTECTIVE LINKPROTECTOR YELLOWALARM BLUFALARM When YELLOWALARM is selected a Yellow Alarm indication on the S2 port causes a switch to T1 E1 over IP in addition to a Loss of Signal Loss of Frame or AIS Blue Alarm condition When BLUEALARM is selected only Loss of Signal Loss of Frame or AIS Blue Alarm causes a Switch PASSTHRU PROTECTIVESWITCH LINKPROTECTOR FAILOVERPERIOD NNN Time in seconds that LinkProtector evaluates the integrity of the link Valid range is 1 to 255 seconds PASSTHRU PROTECTIVESWITCH LINKPROTECTOR FAILOVERTHRESHOLD NNN Percentage of errored seconds If exceeded within the FailoverPeriod this will cause the path to failover to the LAN interface IPTube protocol Valid range is 1 to 100 percent PASSTHRU PROTECTIVESWITCH LINKPROTECTOR FAILBACKPERIOD NNN Time in seconds LinkProtector evaluates the integrity of the link Valid range is 1 to 255 seconds PASSTHRU PROTECTIVESWITCH LINKPROTECTOR FAILBACKTHRESHOLD NNN Percentage of errored seconds If NOT exceeded within the FailBackPeriod this will cause the path to failback to the S2 interface PassThru protocol Valid range is 1 to 100 percent Link Protector Alarm Relay Commands PASSTHRU PROTECTIVESWITCH LINKPROTECTOR ALARMRELAY Off LANFail TELFail LANorTELFail Dependant upon the AlarmRelay setting the IP Tube will connect the contacts 1 and 2 of the relay on an alarm
132. ck on one of the IP TubeRS530s need to be set to Internal and the other to PLL The SCR CLOCK will be set to run at the same speed as the SCTCLOCK without gapping so that buffering of packets is required and the Frames Per Packet is set to the maximum for maximum efficiency For this example the user will select Frames Per Packet 20 With this TUBE FPP setting the Overhead Table in Chapter 6 indicates an approximate 3 496 ratio is 1 034 overhead IP Tube Ethernet Data rate is 1 034 times 1 536 Mbps Command Line Listing Host Name IPTube 530 IP Default router Interface E1 IP Address of this IP Tube IP Address 192 168 1 1 24 Interface S1 Type RS 530 SCR Normal SCT Normal Protocol IPTube Tube On 121 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide IP Address of the Remote IP Tube Tube Address 192 168 1 2 Tube TOS 0x08 Tube FPP 20 Tube Clock Internal Tube SCRCLOCK MODE NX64K Tube SCRCLOCK FACTOR 24 Tube SCTCLOCK MODE NX64K Tube SCTCLOCK FACTOR 24 Tube Buffer 10 Tube Interval 0 Tube Percentage 100 122 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Chapter 5 Command Line Interface The IP Tube Command Line can be accessed with a serial connection to the Console port or a Telnet connection via the Ethernet interface For communication through the Console port almost any standard terminal communication software can be used such as Hyperterm or Teraterm The console po
133. cking int co Host Contact No contact specified Host Location No location specified OurDNSServer IP Default router 255 255 255 255 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off 113 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide SSHD Off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 2 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface S1 Type V 35 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 114 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Interface S2 Type V 35 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol I
134. controlled by the Tube Buffers and Frames Per Packet FPP configuration parameters The window needs to be large enough to allow detection and retransmission of missing packets The window can be expressed in terms of packets or time Tube Buffers specify the window in terms of packets The combination of Tube Buffers and Frames Per Packets specifies the window in terms of time Every 8 Frames Per Packet is one millisecond of time Therefore the number of Frames Per Packet divided by 8 times the number of Tube Buffers yields the time in milliseconds of the ADP window FPP 8 x Tube Buffers ADP Window milliseconds The ADP window is the delay created by buffering packets on the transmit side of the Serial port Configuring Tube Buffers for ADP Round Trip Delay is the time it takes for an ADP packet to be sent and its acknowledgement re ceived under normal conditions This can usually be determined by issuing a ping command to a remote tube to determine the round trip time Note A ping from a workstation is likely to give a more accurate round trip time than a ping from an IP Tube Tube Buffers and Frames Per Packet should be configured for at least one and a half times the Round Trip Delay Normally it should be twice the Round Trip Delay If Round Trip Delay is short it can be much more In general the larger the difference between the size of the ADP window and the Round Trip Delay the higher the probability that ADP
135. controls the flow of packet data from LAN1 to LAN2 The Rate Limiter turns on bridging from LAN1 to LAN2 RateLimit 1 20 The Rate Limit parameter will set the megabits per second options are 1 Mbps to 20 Mbps of output on LAN2 ONLY Some devices will be restricted in how many Mbps can be received such as ADSL or SDSL Routers and the Tube unit can manage the amount of bandwidth that is allocated to the LAN1 to LAN2 bridge traffic in order to ensure the required bandwidth is available for the TUBE s TDM Over IP 557 SIGTRAN SNIFFER ETHERREAL Configuration The IP Tube GT1 SS7 SIG monitors SS7 messaging on a T1 circuit Each SS7 message is convert ed to SIGTRAN format The IP Tube will create an IP UDP header for the message The destination address is set in the IP Tube for the IP header The source address is that of the IP tube itself This will enable the IP packets to be routed to a remote network where Ethereal can capture the packets for decoding logging and storage Packets can be captured based on the source IP destination IP or 163 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide both addresses Multi port T1 IP Tubes will also use unique UDP port numbers for each T1 The SCTP decode within Ethereal will show the DPC and OPC as well as MTP2 and MTP3 data To decode the SIGTRAN packets in Ethereal follow these steps Click Filter under the Menu bar and Tool bar Type a string myfilter
136. copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute distribute with modifications sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM 232 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name s of the above copyright holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
137. d facilitates quick reversion to the Telco T1 E1 link during debug of T1 E1 over IP The Switch Option is controlled by the PassThru configuration item using the Command Line Inter face When PassThru is Off the IP Tube operates in the normal manner with T1 E1 over IP running on the S1 interface and S2 interface if enabled When PassThru is On the circuit on the S1 interface is passed through the S2 interface T1 E1 over IP is turned Off When PassThru is On configuration is altered from normal IP Tube configuration in the following way 1 Tube Framing determines whether framing information is passed through to S2 If 51 Tube Framing T1framed or E1framed is chosen the framing bit in the case of T1 or the framing byte in the case of E1 is passed through to S2 If 51 Tube Framing Transparent is chosen the S2 interface generates the T1 framing bit or the E1 framing byte independent of the S1 interface In this case there is no multiframe alignment between the S1 and S2 interfaces The configuration of S2 Tube Framing has no effect All other S1 and S2 Tube configuration parameters have no effect The S1 T1 configuration parameters Data LBO Framing Coding IdleCharacter and Channels are auto matically selected for the S2 interface as well For the IP Tube G product S1 PassThru interface is S2 and S3 PassThru interface is S4 To prevent confussion the manual will discuss operation using the S1 and S2 interfaces Interface S3 and S4 will operat
138. d for LAN1 Displayed in hex with values ranging from 0x00 to 0x08 Preceding the entry with Ox results in a direct Hexidecimal input Example Tube 1 TOS 0x08 Note It is possible to set the Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP field using the TOS value The Differentiated Services DiffServ uses the same byte in the IP Header as the TOS The 6 MSB of the TOS byte are the same bits used for setting the DSCP value To enter the Expedited Forwarding EF DSCP value enter the following hex value in the TOS field 0xB8 This will mark these packets as EF 143 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Compression TUBE COMPRESSION ON OFF Enables and disables compression on IP Tube C models IP Tube DLT1 E1 C and GT1 E1 C models are equipped with Compression Capability TUBE COMPRESSION SILENCEDETECT ON OFF When TUBE COMPRESSION is On SilenceDetect can be enabled or disabled SilenceDetect is a lossy compression of a silent or nearly silent voice channel TUBE COMPRESSION SILENCEDETECT THRESHOLD 0 6 SilenceDetect Threshold determines the signal level that is considered to be silence A Threshold of 0 is a zero signal level If all the Mu Law data of a channel in a Tube packet are at a level of zero the channel will be compressed A Threshold of 1 compresses the data of a channel if the Mu Law values are between 1 and 1 A Threshold of 2 compresses channels with Mu law
139. d parameters for the TUBE BUFFERS and TUBE FPP frames per packet The 8 000 bits of T3 are loaded into IP packet that is IP addressed and sent to the other IPTube T3 where these bits are buffered The buffering provides 2 milliseconds of elasticity to accomodate Eth ernet Jitter IP Packet Encapsulation Overhead The encapsulation of T3 data into IP UDP packets for transmission over Ethernet adds overhead due to the Ethernet IP and UDP headers a total of 44 bytes This 44 byte overhead is a very small per rcentage of the 1000 byte packet payload that it does not need to be taken into account when consid 192 Chapter 9 IP Tube Configuration and Operation Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide ering Ethernet bandwidth utilization The IPTubeT3 utilizes 5 more than the clock rate of 44 736 Megabits of the Packet network IP Tube Cabling LEGACY T3 EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION Firmware 39 72 xx LAN The IP Tubes use standard 10 100BaseT Ethernet cabling to connect to an Ethernet switch T3 The T3 uses 75 ohm coaxial connectors for the Transmit and Receive signals Transmit is the ouput and Receive is the input UNIT 1 IP Default router 255 255 255 255 Tube Capability On Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off Interface LAN1 Auto Negotiation On IP Address 192 168 3 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING Interface T3 Type T3 Protocol IP
140. d successfully Switch 2 Applies only to IP Tube C units with lossless DSO compression Setting to ON will disable the compression Note this must be done at each IP Tube and a RESTART or power cycle executed Switch 3 Switch 3 is used during manufacturing to test the VCXO The switch must be set to OFF for normal operation Switch 4 When turned ON it forces the IP Tube into a loopback mode This is useful for trouble shooting the Telco Serial connection The IP Tube UNO and G4 has a single pushbutton switch SW2 When holding this switch durring the boot cycle it will do the following Force operation from Base Flash and delete downloaded upgrades On the UNO the switch is accessable through the rear panel via a paperclip On the G4 the rear panel must be removed and the motherboard slid out a bit to access the switch 16 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide Assured Delivery Protocol The IP Tube Assured Delivery Protoco ADP offers reliable delivery of IP Tube packets in an un reliable network environment ADP can re sequence packets delivered out of order and detect and retransmit missing packets ADP achieves it s purpose by including acknowledgements of received Tube packets in every Tube packet sent The receiving Tube can then detect and retransmit missing packets The ADP Window ADP depends on a window of time to achieve reliability This window of time is
141. de Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 2 53 IP Default 192 168 2 50 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 LBO CSU 0dB E1 Framing ESF E1 Coding B8ZS E1 IdleCharacter Ox7f E1 Channels Fractional 1 8 16 24 This config will include 8 channels starting with channel 1 and 16 thru 24 Interface S2 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1LBO CSU 0dB E1 Framing ESF 92 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Interface S3 E1 Coding B8ZS E1 IdleCharacter Ox7f E1 Channels Fractional 1 8 16 24 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168
142. derations Improper E3 clocking will result in an overrun or underrun condition which causes E3 frame losses The IP TubeE3 s Transmit clocking is fixed at Phase Lock Loop One of the devices connected to the IPTubeE3 s needs to have its clocking configured for internal Latency and Bandwidth Considerations The IP Tube has fixed parameters for the TUBE BUFFERS and TUBE FPP frames per packet The 8 000 bits of E3 are loaded into IP packet that is IP addressed and sent to the other IPTube E3 where these bits are buffered The buffering provides 2 milliseconds of elasticity to accomodate Eth ernet Jitter IP Packet Encapsulation Overhead The encapsulation of E3 data into IP UDP packets for transmission over Ethernet adds overhead due to the Ethernet IP and UDP headers a total of 44 bytes This 44 byte overhead is a very small per rcentage of the 1000 byte packet payload that it does not need to be taken into account when consid ering Ethernet bandwidth utilization The IPTubeE3 utilizes 5 more than the clock rate of 34 368 Megabits of the Packet network 199 Chapter 10 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide IP Tube Cabling LEGACY E3 EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION Firmware 39 72 xx LAN The IP Tubes use standard 10 100BaseT Ethernet cabling to connect to an Ethernet switch E3 The uses 75 coaxial connectors for the Transmit and Receive signals Tran
143. e Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off 50 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 2 T1 ports Interface S3 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 3 T1 ports Interface S4 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off 51 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communi
144. e default router on the net serving as Default Gateway for all net workstations does not know about the remote IP net where the remote IP Tube is located SSHD Not Working 204 If an SSH client cannot make a connection to the IP Tube check the following items Do not enter a pass phrase to create the host key Be sure to use the host key without the pub extension Make sure the SSHD is configured ON Check that the SSHD Port number is the same as the Client attempting the connection Look at the Show SSHD Info status Check if SSHD is On or there is already a session active only one allowed or the host key is not valid Use the Client logging facilities to gather information about the failed connection attempt For the OpenSSH client use the vvv option For the SecureCRT client select the Raw Log Options from the File menu Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Troubleshooting Tools A good place to start is to make sure that the configurations of both IP Tubes match except the follow ing three items LAN IP Addresses each should be unique Tube Destination Addresses should point to the other units LAN Address e 1 1 Clocking Setting one set for Internal or Network and the other to V2PLL Make sure the IP Tubes can ping one another Information Here is a sample of the Show Information command for a LAN interface Important information points are discussed below
145. e 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 1 T1 port Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 2 T1 ports Interface S3 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 48 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 3 T1 ports Interf
146. e Console port is configured as a DCE Data Communication Equipment port An RJ45 to DB9 adapter is provided with the IP Tube which provides a physical interface permitting direct connection to DTE equipment such as the COM1 interface of a PC Pinouts for the Console port as well as Engage supplied adapters are provided in the Appendices Communication to the console port should be set for 9600 baud 1 stop bit no parity 8 bit fixed flow control none Once a serial connection between a workstation and the IP Tube Console port is established and a carriage return CR is entered a LOGIN prompt will appear The default Login is root No password is needed until it is user set The command PASSWD can be used to set a password Configuring the Engage IP Tube for the LAN The IP Tube needs to be configured with a number of parameters for proper operation on the local area network including Ethernet IP address and subnet mask IP data target unit IP address and subnet mask Default gateway if the IP data target is on another IP network The configuration procedure depends on the network environment in which the IP Tube is to be installed Note It is strongly suggested that you configure the IP Tube with its unique network identity before making any Ethernet or Wide Area connections Ethernet Interface The DLT1 GT1 DLE1 GE1 RS530LS RS530HS RS232 V 35LS V 35HS models use a 10 100BaseT to connect to the Local Area Network Ea
147. e Interval was used in legacy equipment and is left here for informational purposes It is recommended that Tube Interval be set to 0 The IP Tube Interval command is used to control the gapping of the transmit SCT and receive SCR clocks Permitted values are 0 to 63 An Interval of 0 does not gap the clock An Interval consists of the period defined by the Frames Per Packet times the Bytes Per Frame times the bits per byte divided by the SCxCLOCK setting The Bytes Per Frame is set to 64 The FPP is user configu rable and the bits per byte is 8 TUBE INTERVAL is used to regulate the packet rate Regulation of the packet rate provides for a mechanism to control the data rate of the IP gt Tube RS530 V 35 The Interval setting be utilized to clock data out of the DTE into a packet at its maximum clocking rate so as to minimize latency There are 2 methods of controlling the IP Tube data rate One method is to set the SCxCLOCK rates to the data rate required This method can double the delay if in the IP Tube network connection is a WAN link The other method is to set the SCXCLOCK to the DTE s maximum clocking rate and regu late the packet rate with the Interval setting For an example on how to configure Tube Interval the user will select Frames Per Packet 10 With this TUBE FPP setting the tables in Chapter 7 indicate an approximate 7 ratio is 1 069 overhead The WAN Point to Point Protocol overhead is off set with the Ethern
148. e Ratelimiter Tubes this setting applies to both LAN ports for non Ratelimiter Tubes for only the specified LAN port must preceed with interface LAN1 or interface LAN2 command OFF disables 802 1q tagging and processing TUBE ETHERNET 802 1P PRIORITY NN Sets the value of the priority tag on transmitted IP Tube packets The valid range is 0 to 7 This value only has effect if IEEE 802 1P tagging of Tube packets is enabled TUBE ETHERNET 802 1Q VLANID NN Specifies the VLAN ID for the tag on transmitted IP Tube packets This value only has effect if IEEE 802 1P Q tagging of Tube packets is enabled TUBE TOS Sets the Type of Service Byte in the IP packets in which T1 E1 frames are encapsulated The setting of the TOS byte can be used to ensure that the real time TDM data from the IP Tube is ensured high priority assuming Quality of Service support is provided by each router or switch in the IP path be tween the IP Tubes Alternatively the IP destination address can be used to ensure that the IP Tube IP packets receive the required priority and bandwidth IP TOS is defined in the IETF RFC 1349 ac cessable online at www ietf org A TOS setting of 0x08 maximizes throughput TUBE 1 2 TOS 0xNN Sets the Type of Service Byte in the IP packets in which the T1 E1 frames are encapsulated The 1 2 specifier selects the Ethernet interface for the Type of Service Byte If 1 2 is not specified the Type of Service Byte is configure
149. e T3 Configuration amp Operation This chapter provides operational theory and configuration details specific to the IP Tube model with Firmware Version 39 72 xx To verify Firmware Version login to unit and type show router IP Tube Installation Steps The process of installing an IP Tube involves the following steps e Planning for the IP Tube interconnect e Installing the IP Tube hardware e Configuring System and Ethernet parameters e Configuring the IP Tube interface parameters Making Ethernet and T3 cabling connections e Verifying IP Tube connectivity System and Ethernet Parameters The IPTube s System parameters and LAN interface configuration items are described in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface for specific syntax requirements This portion of the manual is dedicated to the installation parameters associated with the T3 interface T3 Parameters The IP Tube does not have any related configuration parameters All the data bits of the are put transparently into the Tube s IP packets The IPTubeT3 supports all Framing and Coding configurations T3 Clocking Considerations Improper T3 clocking will result in an overrun or underrun condition which causes T3 frame losses The IP TubeT3 s Transmit clocking is fixed at Phase Lock Loop One of the devices connected to the IPTubeT3 s needs to have its clocking configured for internal Latency and Bandwidth Considerations The IP Tube has fixe
150. e User s Guide its UDP Port configuration Note Engage has registered with the IANA UDP port 3175 decimal reference www iana org assign ments port numbers For the IP Tubes DLT1 E1 and GT1 GE1 use the following UDP port numbers depending on which ports are activated e Port 1 UDP port 3175 Port2 UDP port 3176 Port3 UDP port 3177 Port4 UDP port 3178 IP Tube IP Packet Type of Service The TUBE TOS command is used to set the Type of Service byte in the IP packets encapsulated in the T1 E1 frames The setting of the TOS byte can be used to ensure that the real time TDM data from the IP Tube is ensured high priority The Quality of Service support is required within each router or switch within the interconnect between the IP Tubes A TOS setting of 0x08 maximizes through put TUBE TOS 0x08 An alternative to the use of the TOS byte is the configuration for QoS based on UDP port number Engage has registered UDP port assignment 3175 QoS configuration to prioritize UDP packets des tined for port 3175 can be setup Note It is possible to set the Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP field using the TOS value The Differentiated Services DiffServ uses the same byte in the IP Header as the TOS The 6 MSB of the TOS byte are the same bits used for setting the DSCP value To enter the Expedited Forwarding EF DSCP value enter the following hex value in the TOS field 0xB8 This will mark these packets as EF Communicatio
151. e a local IP Tube has failed over to LAN2 but the remote IP Tube has not If LAN1 and LAN2 have a difference in packet delay there is a corresponding difference in packet sequence number between LAN1 and LANA If the difference in packet sequence number is sufficiently large when switching to LAN1 or LAN2 there may be a very brief loss of data as the IP Tube must synchronize to the packet sequence of the new data stream 19 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide Protector Configuration Saving configuration on the Serial Port causes a resetless configuration change to take place This results in a temporary loss of service that while short in duration may cause a Protector on the remote IP Tube to fail over to LAN2 When this occurs it will be a Qualification period of time before the remote IP Tube fails back to LAN1 Protector Command Line Interface TUBE LANPORT PROTECTOR Select Tube LANport PROTECTOR to place the IP Tube in Protector mode Protector mode requires the proper configuration of Tube 1 and Tube 2 Destination UDPPORT TOS Ethernet Arp and Ether net Address Tube 1 and Tube 2 correspond to the Tubes for LAN1 and LAN2 respectively TUBE PROTECTOR HARDSWITCH ON OFF When HardSwitch is On the Protector transmits on LAN2 only when the remote Protector requests a fail over to LAN2 When HardSwitch is Off the Protector transmits on LAN2 and LAN1 Note Tube Protector Hard
152. e code in bits If the first argument is DOWN CODE specifies the hexadecimal code for LOOP DOWN and LENGTH specifies the length of the code in bits Example config int s1 tube loopcoderesponse Ilbcsu tube loopcoderesponse up code 1 tube loopcoderesponse up length 5 tube loopcoderesponse down code 1 tube loopcoderesponse down length 3 TUBE AcceptRLBRequest ON OFF AcceptRLBRequest must be On for a local IPTube to respond to loopback requests from a remote 149 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide IPTube configured with LoopCodeResponse RLBCSU or RLBTube Otherwise loopback requests from the remote IPTube are ignored Example config int s1 tube acceptribrequest on SSHD On Off Enables or disables the SSH Server SSHD Port port number Specifies the TCP port number for incoming SSH sessions SSHD HostKey Enter OpenSSH DSA Key Configures the SSH Server host key The SSH Server must have a host key for an SSH Client to ac cept a connection from the Server The lt OpenSSH DSA Key must be in OpenSSH format Units shipped with this base firmware or later versions have an SSH Server host key already config ured Use this command to change the host key Units running base firmware that did not previously support SSH will need to run this command after an upgrade to a version that supports SSH Most SSH Client software have the facility to generate an Open
153. e is experienced with an IP Tube please contact the Engage Communication Service Center If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telecommunications service provider may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved Engage Communication Service Center Phone U S 1 831 688 1021 Fax 1 831 688 1421 Email support engageinc com Web www engageinc com Engage Communication User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 1 1 Introduction 1 Family 1 LAN Interface 2 WAN Interface 2 About this Guide 2 Organization 2 Intended Audience 3 Chapter 2 4 Installation QuickStart 4 Communication with the IP Tube 4 Console Port 4 Telnet 4 Editing amp Pasting Configurations 4 IP Tube Cabling 5 IP Tube Configuration Parameters 5 IP Tube System Parameters 5 IP Tube Data Conversion Parameters 6 Interface Specific Parameters 8 IP Tube RS530 RS232 V 35 X 21 Clock 9 Chapter 3 12 Installation of the IP Tube 12 Installation Requirements 12 Installing the Hardware 12 Locating the IP Tube 12 Powering the IP Tube 12 Console Port 13 Configuring the Engage IP Tube for the LAN 13 Ethernet Interface 13 IP Tube Serial Interface Options 14 T1 fractional T1 Interface 14 E1 fractionalE1 Interface 14 RS530 Interface 14 RS232 Interface 14 V 35 Interface 15 Status LEDs 15 IP Tube RS530 RS232 V 35 models 16 Internal Switches 16 Assured Delivery Protocol 17 The ADP Window 17 Configu
154. e just as S1 and S2 respectively Switch PassThru Clock To determine clocking when PassThru is On the T1 PassThru configuration parameter is used The T1 Clocking configuration parameter is ignored A clock master may be connected to the S1 interface connected to the S2 interface between two IP Tubes in PassThru mode or connected to the S2 interface of the remote IP Tube Whatever the case there should be only one clock master If the clock master is connected to the S1 interface set T1 PassThruClock Network for the S1 inter face and T1 PassThruClock Internal for the S2 interface Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock NETWORK Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock INTERNAL If the clock master is connected to the S2 interface or connected to the S1 interface of the remote Tube set T1 PassThruClock TEL2 for the S1 interface and T1 PassThruClock Network for the 52 interface Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock TEL2 Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock NETWORK If you wish to set the IP Tube as the Clock Master set T1 PassThruClock TEL2 for the S1 interface and T1 PassThruClock Internal for the S2 interface The equipment connected to the S1 and S2 interfaces should be configured for slave timing A remote IP Tube in this configuration should be configured as if a clock master is connected on the S2 interface set 1 PassThruClock TEL2 for the S1 interface and T1 PassThruClock Network for the S2 interface 22 Chapter 3 Installation En
155. e or the Default Router and any local device that wants to communicate with the IP Tube needs to be configured with the MAC address of the IP Tube in its ARP table Due to the complexity involved in setting up the IP Address to Ethernet MAC address manually it is recom mended that BroadcastRCV be set to On unless broadcast storms are expected on the network where the IP Tubes reside 5 Chapter 2 Installation QuickStart Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide IP Tube Default Router If the Remote IP Tube whose IP address is configured with TUBE ADDRESS resides on a different IP network from the Local IP Tube a default router must be specified The Default Router is typically the local IP WAN Router IP DEFAULT ROUTER aaa bbb ccc ddd IP Tube Data Conversion Parameters The IP Tube has enable disable commands as well as control of Protocol Framing Encapsulation Tube Destination Address Destination UDP Port IP Type of Service TOS Buffers Frames per Packet FPP and Compression optional These parameters are manipulated within the Serial Interface Configuration s Protocol The interface protocol controls the packetization format of the IP Tube The options are IPTUBE CESoIP and HDLCoIP IPTUBE Protocol encapsulates the data bits selected into UDP packets CESoIP Protocol encapsulates the data bits selected into UDP packets with an RTP header HDLCoIP Protocol encapsulates HDLC frames into UDP packets with an RTP h
156. eader This protocol is used to interconnect data networks that utilize WAN protocols such as PPP Frame Relay HDLC and SDLC Type The interface type LAN1 E1 T1 RS530 V35 is defined by the IP Tube model purchased Do not change the Interface Type as it is hardware dependent IP Tube Enable The IP Tube is enabled by the command TUBE ON IP Tube Framing The IP Tube parameter TUBE FRAMING is set to either Transparent or T1 E1 Framed Transparent framing encapsulates the DSO data without the T1 E1 framing information T1Framed encapsulates the T1 framing bits along with the DSO data E1Framed encapsulates the E1 framing byte along with the DSO data A DSO is a 64 Kbps Voice Data circuit T1 frames have 24 DSOs and a framing bit for a total of 193 bits per frame E1 frames have 31 DSOs and a Framing Signaling Byte for a total of 32 bytes per frame Note Tube Framing only applies to DLT1 E1 or GT1 E1 IP Tubes Using a Loopback plug with T1 E1 Framed is not a valid test configuration IP Tube Destination Address TUBE ADDRESS aaa bbb ccc ddd Specifies the IP address of the receiving IP Tube Note Loopback of the IP Tube data occurs when the Destination Address is the same as the IP ad dress of the Ethernet interface IP Tube Destination UDP Port TUBE UDPPORT nnnn Specifies the UDP port source and destination address The IP Tube only accepts packets that match 6 Chapter 2 Installation QuickStart Engage Communication IP Tub
157. edgement to travel back To account for IP network jitter and a small delay inherent in ADP DelayRetransmit should be config ured to the value of Round Trip Delay plus 2 The DelayRetransmit configuration parameter is specified in terms of packets If working with Round Trip Delay in terms of time convert to packets Round Trip Delay packets Round Trip Delay milliseconds x FPP 8 The CountRetransmit configuration parameter determines how often a packet should be retransmit ted Typically this can be set to 1 CountRetransmit can be thought of as a delay after a packet is first retransmitted before it is re transmitted again ADP will wait CountRetransmit Retransmit cycles before it Retransmits the packet again For example if CountRetransmit is 3 then the retransmission of an unacknowledged packet occurs every third Tube packet sent In bandwidth limited IP networks where there is a significant Round Trip Delay CountRetransmit can be increased to avoid continuous retransmission of a missing packet for which acknowledgement will be delayed a significant amount of time CountRetransmit applies to each packet independently of LimitRetransmit ADP will always Re transmit at most LimitRetransmit number of packets after a Tube packet is sent ADP may choose not to Retransmit a particular packet because it had previously been retransmitted and has yet to execute CountRetransmit number of Retransmit cycles Assured Delivery C
158. election of the T1 E1 DSO s starting channel and number of channels is setup by the Se rial Interface s T1 E1 configuration commands A DSO is a 64 Kbps Voice Data circuit E1 frames have 31 DSO s plus a Framing Signaling Byte for a total of 32 bytes per frame E1 TXUNDERRUNAIS ON OFF ON Enable the transmission of an unframed All Ones BLUE Alarm Code out the E1 interface if the E1 transmitter underruns This is only required when Tube Framing is set to transparent and the Telco equipment does not identify a framed All Ones as a BLUE Alarm Note Transmit Underruns occur when the IP packets flow is interrupted or stopped OFF disables generation of an AIS Note Tube Framing E1 sends an All Ones out the E1 interface in the event of an underrun regardless of this setting E1 DATA NORMAL INVERTED Can be set for Normal or Inverted and must agree with the setting of the DSU CSU on the other end E1 CLOCKING NETWORK INTERNAL V2PLL PLL GPS OCXO GPSBackupOCXO Determines the source of Transmit Clock TxCk When set to Network the DSU CSU derives its transmit timing from the received data RxD This is also referred to as Slave timing When set to Internal the DSU CSU transmits data at a rate set by an internal clock This mode is referred to as Master timing and is often used when testing E1 connections on the bench When set to GPS the DSU CSU transmits data at a rate set by a GPS Antenna This mode is also referred
159. er Packet The recommended configuration for low latency for T1 is FPP 8 for E1 it s FPP 12 IP Tube Compression TUBE COMPRESSION ON Enables compression on IP Tube C models IP Tube Ethernet ARP TUBE Ethernet ARP OFF Uses the Ethernet MAC address specified by the TUBE Ethernet Address setting TUBE Ethernet ARP ON Uses the Ethernet MAC address obtained automatically by the IP Tube s IP to Ethernet MAC Address Resolution Protocol ARP Note Unless Broadcast storms are expected it is highly recommended that the automatic resolution of the IP address to Ethernet MAC address is utilized by setting TUBE Ethernet ARP On ARP On is the Default IP Tube Ethernet Address TUBE ETHERNET ADDRESS aabbccddeeff Allows the user to specify the Ethernet MAC address for the IP Tube IP packet The TUBE Ethernet MAC Address needs to match the MAC address of the destination IP Tube or the Default Router Interface Specific Parameters T1 Configuration Parameters The IP Tube T1 serial interface number 1 S1 is configured for T1 operation at the factory The fol lowing T1 parameters must match the configuration of the DS1 T1 interface to which it is connected The T1 clock setting is dependent upon the source of the T1 Clock Interface S1 Type T1 T1 Data Normal Invert 1 Clocking X Internal Network V2PLL PLL GPS OCXO GPSBackupOCXO T1 LBO CSU OdB 7 5 15 22 5 T1 Framing ESF D4 T1 Coding B8ZS AMI
160. er of LAN data to memory or a frame was received and dis card due to lack of buffers or a large frame was received Receive Framing A nonoctect aligned frame was received Receive Misc A short frame was received or a general error indicating an unexpected result in an buffer descriptor or a buffer that was not a complete frame was recieved on the Ethernet channel Packets Transmitted Number of LAN packets transmitted Transmit CSL Carrier sense lost during frame transmission Transmit UN Underrun the Ethernet controller encountered a transmitter underrun while sending a buffer Transmit RL Retransmission Limit The transitter failed attempts to successfully send a message due to repeated collisions statistic not set on IPTube Transmit LC Late collision A collision occured after 64 bytes are sent statistic not set on IPTube 128 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Transmit Misc Unspecified transmit error not associated with a buffer Serial Interface Statistics Packets Received Number serial of packetes received Receive CRC CRC error Should not occur with Procotol IPTube Receive Overrun Overrun of internal FIFO used in transfer of serial data to memory or a frame was received and dis card due to lack of buffers or a large frame was received Receive Framing Set when a frame containing a number of bits not exactly divisible by eight is received Receive
161. et MAC addresses not being transported across the WAN link although the HDLC framing does bit stuffing that could bump the data bandwidth by 8 So the total overhead is 7 for the IP UDP plus 8 for bit stuffing Therefore the desired clock rate on RS530 is 64Kbps 1 15 55Kbps In order to minimize the latency involved in clocking the data from the encrypter s serial interface the encrypter will be clocked at its maximum rate and the Tube Interval setting will be used to hold off clocking the next packet of data until the ISDN WAN router has been able to transmit the prior packet To determine the Tube Interval setting take the maximum clocking rate of the DTE divide it by the data rate and subtract one The encrypter s maximum clocking rate is 2 048Mbps Divisor 2 048 000 55 000 37 2 Round down 2 048 000 37 55 351 Note Slightly greater clocking rate is okay since bit stuffing of 8 is worst case of every data byte being stuffed Interval Divisor minus 1 36 158 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Note The time of clock gapping equals FPP BytePerFrame BitsPerByte 2 048Mbps times Interval FPP 10 BPP 64 SCRCLOCK 55 351 Interval 36 10 64 8 2 048 000 36 0 09 90 milliseconds This amount of gap can result in synchronization mode limitations The clock gapping delay can be reduced by reducing the FPP overhead impact and the SCTCLOCK base rate latency im
162. et data from the buffer memory into the DTE SCTCLOCK This command is used to clock data from the DTE into IP packets that are sent to the TUBE AD DRESS IP Tube RS530 RS232 V 35 X 21 Clock The TUBE CLOCK command is used to set the source of the Serial Clock Receive and Transmit Timing signals When SCRCLOCK needs to match the SCTCLOCK exactly with a smooth non gapped clock TUBE INTERVAL 0 then one of the IP gt TUBE RS530 V 35 s needs to have its TUBE CLOCK set to INTERNAL and the other needs to be set to PLL and TUBE BUFFERing needs to be utilized 9 Chapter 2 Installation QuickStart Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide TUBE CLOCK INTERNAL TUBE CLOCK PLL SCxCLOCK MODE NX2K4 NX56K AND NX64K IPeTube SCxCLOCK FACTOR Note TUBE SCxCLOCK MODE NXxxx is multiplied by SCxCLOCK FACTOR to produce the SCx CLOCK NX2K4 2 4k times factor Maximum factor is 18 Data rate from 2 4K to 43 2K NX56K 56k times factor Maximum factor is 32 Data rate from 56K to 1792K NX64K 64k times factor Maximum factor is 32 Data rate from 64K to 2048K TUBE SCRCLOCK FACTOR value DIVIDEBY value DIVIDEBY applied to BOTH SCR and SCT clock settings and must be an EVEN number DIVIDEBY Minimum factor is 2 DIVIDEBY Maximum factor is 32 To turn off the DIVIDEBY function symply do not enter the text after SCRCLOCK FACTOR value SCRCLOCK MODE TUBE SCRCLOCK MODE NX2K4 NX56K NX64K
163. ets received on the Ethernet interface are transmitted back out the Ethernet interface with the source and destination IP address and UDP ports exchanged Frames received on the Serial Port are not transmitted on the Ethernet interface when REMOTELOOP is ON REMOTELOOP takes ef fect after saving a configuration but will be set to Off after a subsequent reset TUBE CONFIRMREMOTEALIVE Command TUBE CONFIRMREMOTEALIVE ON OFF DONOTTALK Turning CONFIRMREMOTEALIVE ON will enable the IP Tube to poll the remote unit and see if it is on line If the remote unit is available it will begin streeming IP Packets This will prevent the IP Tube from flooding the Network with IP Packets if the remote unit is not avilable If DONOTTALK is set the IP Tube will not poll the remote unit It will stream packets only if the remote IP Tube is sending packets One unit would be set to CONFIRMREMOTEALIVE ON and the 136 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide other unit to DONOTTALK Seting both IP Tubes to CONFIRMREMOTEALIVE DONOTTALK is not recommended If this is OFF the IP Tube will stream data regardless of the remote unit status TUBE LANPORT Commands Tube LANPort LAN1 LAN2 Protector Alternate AltProtector LAN1 and LAN2 select a single LAN port for the IPTube traffic The most common configuration is to have the IPTube traffic utilizing LAN1 Tube LANPort LAN1 TUBE LANPORT Protector TUBE LA
164. f Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S2 Type RS 232 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S3 Type RS 232 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 106 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 50 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3277 Tube 2 TOS 0xB8 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000
165. f Ethernet bandwidth Increasing FPP reduces the effect of this 44 byte overhead The encapsulation overhead can be expressed as a ratio of Data Overhead Data and can be used to calculate the Ethernet bandwidth utilization for a given T1 E1 configuration Example 1 in the QuickStart Chapter noted that 1 906 Mbps of Ethernet bandwidth is required when transporting an encapsulated Full 1 544 Mbps T1 This is based on an overhead ratio of 1 234 or 23 4 overhead The formula for the overhead ratio is KDSO s x 8 TubeFraming x FPP 352 KDSO s x 8 x FPP Notes DSO sis the number of 64 Kbps channels configured on T1 E1 interface e Tube Framing is 0 for Transparent 1 for T1Framed 8 for E1Framed e FPP is the configured Frames Per packet 352 represents the number of bits in the 44 byte overhead formula provides Overhead Ratio The Overhead Percentage would be Overhead Ratio 1 See the Appendices for the overhead ratio of a number of T1 E1 configuration examples including both Full and Fractional IP Tube Compression All of the IP Tube DL and G models are available with built in lossless data compression When enabled on both the local and the remote IP Tube units this feature can achieve a 56 1 compression ratio during periods of idle data on the T1 E1 circuit Example TUBE COMPRESSION ON IP Tube Cabling The IP Tubes use standard 10 100BaseT Ethernet cabling to connect to an Ethernet switch or h
166. f code in the openbsd compat subdirectory are licensed as follows Some code is licensed under a 3 term BSD license to the following copyright holders Todd C Miller Theo de Raadt Damien Miller Eric P Allman The Regents of the University of California Constantin S Svintsoff Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 9 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FORANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF
167. ff Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 90 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Network E1 LBO CSU 0dB E1 Framing ESF E1 Coding B8ZS E1 IdleCharacter Ox7f E1 Channels Fractional 1 8 16 18 24 This config will include 8 channels starting with channel 1 plus channels 16 thru 18 and channel 24 Interface S4 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Network E1 LBO CSU 0dB E1 Framing ESF E1 Coding B8ZS E1 IdleCharacter Ox7f E1 Channels Fractional 1 8 16 18 24 Slave Unit config Host Contact TestUnit Host Location RemoteTestPlace IP Default 192 168 2 50 Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 2 52 24 IP Default 192 168 2 50 91 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Gui
168. ff Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 51 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3278 Tube 2 TOS 0xB8 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Legacy Configurations Examples The following examples are for earlier versions of the IP Tube models for those that have purchased Engage Products in the past yet in many cases they apply to current products They also provide a wider selection of various configuration options If none of the above examples fit your particular situation look for a more ap propriate sampling in the examples below IP Tube T1 and E1 for models DL and G configurations are detailed in this section Examples of typical RS530 and V 35 confgurations are also listed The command line configuration listing is shown for each example The configuration commands are defined in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface as well as in a detailed discussion provided in Chapters 6 and 7 Configuration amp Operation Example 1 IP Tube DLT1 Full 24 DSOs with T1 Framing Bits Scenario This sample configuration details an IP Tube interconnect of a Full T1 with framing bits Note that the IP Tube adds overhead in its conversion of T1 to IP packets so that the full T1 frame rate of 1 544 Mbps requires 1 906 Mbps of interconnect bandwidth on the ethernet side See Chapter 5 Configuration a
169. fied the UDP port source and destination address is configured for LAN1 TUBE BUFFERS value As IP UDP packets are received at the IP Tube Ethernet interface they are buffered prior to the en abling of the T1 transmitter This provides for elasticity The TUBE BUFFERS setting permits the user to configure the number of packets buffered with valid settings from 4 to 85 Note for the Enhanced Protector the number of packets buffered before serial transmission may not be set lower than 20 but still may be set as high as 30 A large value provides greater elasticity but can introduce significant delay The amount of delay can be calculated based on the T1 data rate the TUBE FPP setting see details below and the TUBE BUFFERS setting See Chapter 6 P Tube Configuration and Operation for a detailed analysis of how the IP Tube settings and the LAN WAN interconnection contribute to the overall round trip delay or latency Note Round trip delays in excess of 20 milliseconds may require Echo Cancellation ECAN is not field upgradable must be ordered at time of purchase TUBE OVERFLOWLIMIT value Specifies how many Tube packets in excess of the Tube Buffers setting that the serial transmitter may accumulate before dropping packets This condition occurs when the sending side is sending Frames at a higher data rate than they are being clocked out the overflowing sides clocking rate Additionally when there is a kink in the Tube packet flow and
170. g A packet for a given sequence number never arrived This is a data error Packets Not Arriving are counted only when Tube SequenceRecovery is On or Protocol ADPIPTube is selected Gaps in sequence due to Packets Arriving Late or Packets Not Arriving are filled with data from the next arriving packet 129 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Packets Rcvd w Bad Source IP Addr A packet received with the correct UDP port and destination IP address did not have a source ad dress matching the Tube Destination address This packet is dropped Packets Rcvd w Bad UDP Port A UDP packet received with the correct destination and source IP address did not have a UDP source and destination port number matching the Tube UDPPort number This packet is dropped Transmit Drain Drops This is a serial transmit queue overflow The number of packets in the serial transmit queue exceeds the setting of Tube Buffers by 3 packets and is dropped Transmit Buffer Queue Depth The number of packets in the serial transmit queue SSHD Information SSHD Off The SSHD server is configured off No connections are accepted If configured On on unit start up the SSHD server will be in this state for a very short time until the SSHD server is started SSHD No Host Key Run SSHD HostKey Enter A connection was attempted but the SSHD server does not have a valid host key Use the SSHD HostKey Enter command to configure a va
171. g Local IP Tube Port 1 LED Green But T1 E1 Circuit Extension not working IP Tube IP Interconnect Verification IP Tube Off Net IP Interconnect Verification Show Statistics TCP IP Connection Can t IP Ping Remote IP Tube SSHD Not Working Troubleshooting Tools Information Statistics Appendix IP Tube DL G RS530 V 35 Specifications Ethernet Port LAN Protocol Tube Protocols Serial InterfacesOptional Power Supply Physical T1 Specifications E1 Specifications DLT1 E1 and GT1 E1 Models Lossless Data Compression Echo Cancellation All Models TFTP Online Upgrade Capable FLASH ROMs Management IP Tube Dip Switch Settings All Models Table 5 10 100BaseT Port Specification Table 6 DSU CSU Port Specification Table 7 DSU CSU RJ45 to DB15 Modular Adapter Pinout Table 8 Console Port Pinout Table 9 RS530 DCE Port Specification Table 10 RS530 DTE Port Specification Table 11 RS232 Port Specification Table 12 RS232 DTE Port Specification Table 13 48 Power Connector Table 14 Alarm Relay Contact Table 15 Engage Flash Upgrade Instructions Table 16 Engage CPLD Upgrade Instructions Copyright Notices 201 202 202 202 202 202 202 203 203 203 203 204 204 204 205 205 207 212 212 212 212 212 212 212 212 212 213 213 213 213 214 214 214 214 215 216 217 217 218 219 220 221 223 223 224 225 226 Table of Contents Engage Communication User s Guide G
172. gage Communication User s Guide Local IP Tube Master Clocking Local IP Tube Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock TEL2 Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock INTERNAL Remote IP Tube Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock TEL2 Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock NETWORK PassThru Status PassThru Status is displayed in the output of the Show Configuration and Show Information com mands The PassThru status indicates whether the Tube is operating in the PassThru mode or the IP Tube mode Configuration Considerations If both Serial ports are enabled on the DLT1 IP Tube precaution must be taken when switching PassThru On and Off When PassThru is Off both Serial ports can participate in the T1 over IP functionality of the IP Tube That is data from both Serial ports can be sent out the LAN ports in IP Tube packets if so configured When using PassThru as a switch configure S2 Tube Off so that when PassThru is Off there is no data passed between the S2 port and a LAN port Switch Command Line Interface PASSTHRU ONJOFF Passthru Off results in normal IP Tube operation Passthru On switches the S1 port directly to the S2 port There is no T1 E1 over IP 1 T1 E1 PASSTHRUCLOCK NETWORK INTERNAL TEL2 PassThruClock detefmines the Clocking for a Serial interface when Passthru is On When Passthru is Off the Clocking for a Serial interface is determined by the T1 E1 Clock setting Configure T1 E1 Passthruclock in the follow
173. general it is fine to have the Equalizer ON for all installations T1 MODE Term Monitor Sets the interface mode of T1 interface Term is used when the T1 interface is the only one connect ing to the T1 device Note Monitor mode must only be selected for T1 line receiving only on circuits with substantial signal attenuation such as encountered when connecting into a T1 Monitor jack with isolation resistors Monitor mode is used primarily for signal analysis T1 LBO CSU 0dB 7 5dB 15 dB 22 5dB DSX 1 NN This setting determines the transmitted data TxD waveform to compensate for attenuation on the T1 line Typically Line Build Out is set to the CSU mode where the build out is specified in dB In ap plications where the T1 cabling is short the T1 interface is within 20 feet of the network termination set T1 LBO for 0 dB T1 FRAMING ESF D4 Selects whether ESF Extended Super Frame or D4 framing is to be used This pararmeter is deter mined by the T1 service provider Note The selection of the T1 E1 DSO s starting channel and number of channels is setup by the Se rial Interface s T1 E1 configuration commands A DSO is a 64 Kbps Voice Data circuit E1 frames have 31 DSOs plus a Framing Signaling Byte for a total of 32 bytes per frame T1 CODING B8ZS AMI Selects whether B8ZS or AMI Alternate Mark Inversion line coding is used The T1 service pro vider will specify T1 SPEED 56K 64K 56K se
174. gher precedence default router with the Interface config command IP Default router PING dest address src address number spray Sends an ICMP ECHO message to the specified address Any source address from an interface on the IP Tube can be used This can be useful to test routes across a LAN or WAN interface By default only 1 message packet is sent A numeric value can be entered to send more than one message Also SPRAY can be used to continually send messages until the ESC key is pressed Upgrade Firmware UPGRADE TFTP Server Addr Filename TFTP trivial file transfer protocol provides a means for upgrading IP Tube firmware in a TCP IP environment A TFTP upgrade can be accomplished by aquiring the upgrade file from Engage Com munication Technical Support and placing it on your own local TFTP server Please see Table 14 Engage Flash Upgrade Instructions Example UPGRADE 192 168 1 1 26 72 82 upgrade upg Ensure IP connectivity between the IP Tube and the TFTP server by pinging from one to the other Then issue the upgrade command Note An IP Tube which is running an upgrade must go through a reset This may cause a Telnet con nection to drop If this does occur simply re establish the Telnet connection 126 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide SNMP Configuration SNMP ON OFF Turns ON or OFF receipt and transmission of standard SNMP queries excluding t
175. gradable options at time of purchase Note Improper configuration of T1 E1 clocking will result in an overrun or underrun condition which causes periodic frame losses One of the IP Tubes must be the master clock source or locked onto a master and the remote end unit uses a Phase Lock Loop PLL or Version2 Phase Lock Loop V2PLL circuit to match the master s T1 clock frequency In the case where an IP Tube is being con nected to a T1 line from the Telephone company the IP Tube connected to the Telco T1 line must be set to T1 Clocking Network and the remote unit set to T1 Clocking V2PLL RS 530 V 35 Configuration Parameters The configuration parameters for the IPe Tube RS 530 and the IP Tube V 35 models differ slightly from those for IP Tube DLT1 E1 and GT1 E1 models TUBE FRAMING is not used and the following com mands are unique to these synchronous serial interfaces IP Tube Serial Clock Control The IP Tube RS 530 and V 35 models provide DCE data communication equipment interfaces The DCE interface supplies both the Transmit Clock serial clock transmit or SCT and Receive Clock SCR to the connected DTE date terminal equipment interface The IP Tube RS 530 and V 35 models allow the user to configure these clocks to normal mode or to inverted mode The DTE to which the IP Tube connects may require inverted clock The commands are SCR NORMAL SCT INVERTED SCRCLOCK This command is used to clock the Receive Ethernet pack
176. he SCTCLOCK exactly with a smooth non gapped clock TUBE INTERVAL 0 then one of the IPTUBERS530 V 35s needs to have its TUBE CLOCK set to INTERNAL and the other needs to be set to PLL and TUBE BUFFER must be utilized TUBE REMOTECLOCKCONFIG ON OFF ON enables the Tube s serial port to automatically match the SCR SCT speed of its partner s serial port OFF disables automatic detection and relies on the user s configured speeds TUBE SCRCLOCK MODE NX4M NX5M NX8M Note High Speed Models only These are additional modes available for high speed enabled Tubes NX4M selects 4 Mbps base frequency NX5M selects 5 Mbps base frequency NX8M selects 8 Mbps base frequency maximum factor allowable is 2 and the Tube SCRclock and SCTclock mode and factor values must be identical Note High speed mode requires SCR and SCT clock to be equal TUBE SCRCLOCK MODE NX2K4 NX56K NX64K The TUBE SCRCLOCKMODE setting in combination with the SCRCLOCK FACTOR controls the frequency of the RS530 V 35 DCE interface s Serial Clock Receive TUBE SCRCLOCK FACTOR value TUBE SCRCLOCK MODE NXxxx is multiplied by SCRCLOCK FACTOR to produce the SCR CLOCK NX2K4 2 4k times factor Maximum factor is 18 Data rate from 2 4K to 43 2K e NX56K 56k times factor Maximum factor is 32 Data rate from 56K to 1792K e NX64K 64k times factor Maximum factor is 32 Data rate from 64K to 2048K TUBE SCRCLOCK FACTOR value DIVIDEBY value The TUBE SCRCLOCK FACTOR
177. he TOS byte can be used to ensure that the real time data from the IP Tube is accorded high priority as it traverses the IP network Support for the TOS byte is required within each router or switch making up the interconnect between the IP Tubes A TOS setting of 0x08 maximizes throughput The range of settings for TOS is from 0x00 to 0x08 Note Tube TOS is displayed in hex Preceding the entry with 0x results in a direct hexidecimal input Example TUBE TOS 0x08 Intermediary routers and switches can also be configured for Quality of Service QoS prioritization to ensure that IP Tube packets receive highest priority as they are routed through the IP interconnect This QoS could be configured based on the IP Tube Ethernet IP addresses but a more straightfor ward method makes use of the unique UDP port number used by the IP Tube 172 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide TUBE UDPPORT value TUBE UDPPORT specifies the UDP port source and destination address The IP Tube only accepts packets that match its UDP Port configuration Note Engage has registered with the IANA UDP port 3175 decimal This registered port assignment reference www iana org assignments port numbers allows QoS configuration to prioritize UDP packets destined for port 3175 This prioritization is essential for voice and other traffic which is sensitive to latency and delay o
178. he Tube Clocks on one of the IP Tube V35s are both set to Internal The SCRCLOCK will be set to run at the same speed as the SCTCLOCK without gapping Buffering of packets is not required and the Frames Per Packet is set low minimize latency For this example the user will select Frames Per Packet 2 With this TUBE FPP setting the Overhead Table in Chapter 6 indicates an approximate 34 ratio is 1 34 overhead IP Tube Ethernet Data rate is 1 34 times 128Kbps which equals 171 52 Kilobits per second Command Line Listing Host Name IPTube V 35 IP Default router Interface E1 IP Address of this IP Tube IP Address 192 168 1 1 24 Interface S1 Type V35 SCR Normal SCT Normal Protocol HDLCoIP Tube On IP Address of the Remote IP Tube Tube Address 192 168 1 2 Tube TOS 0x08 Tube FPP 2 Tube Clock Internal Tube SCRCLOCK MODE NX64K Tube SCRCLOCK FACTOR 2 Tube SCTCLOCK MODE NX64K Tube SCTCLOCK FACTOR 2 Tube Buffer 10 Tube Interval 0 Tube Percentage 100 98 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Example 13 IP Tube SER RS530 Master Unit Config for IP Tube SER RS530 DCE Internal Clocking int co Host Contact No contact specified Host Location No location specified OurDNSServer IP Default router 255 255 255 255 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off SSHD Off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient
179. he address for the Default Router Command Line Listing Host Name IP Tube T1 Master Clock IP Default router 192 168 1 4 Interface E1 IP Address of this IP Tube IP Address 192 168 1 1 24 Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Reception Control BroadcastRCV ON Interface S1 Type T1 Tube Parameters Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Framing Transparent 117 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide IP Address of remote IP Tube Tube Address 192 168 2 1 Tube UDPPort 3175 Tube TOS 0x08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 8 Tube Destination Ethernet Address Resolution Tube Ethernet ARP On Tube Ethernet Address T1 Parameters T1 Data Normal T1 Transmit timing set to Internal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7F START CHANNEL NUMBER OF CHANNELS T1 Channels Fractional 1 8 12 14 18 24 Note When more then one group of channels not contigous hyphens and commas can be used to list all group or individual channels Example 3 IP Tube T1 Compression 24 DSOs with 56 to 1 Compression Scenario This sample configuration details an IP Tube interconnect of a Full T1 with compression enabled Note For the IP Tube DL and G models T1 compression must be without framing bits DSO 1 through 24 are trans ported This IP Tube is set to internal timing as the master clock of the IP Tube s T1 connection The remote IP Tube m
180. iation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 2 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface S1 Type E3 Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube ConfirmRemoteAlive On Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS OxB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Buffers 5 Tube Duplicates 0 E3 Clocking PLL 197 Chapter 10 IP Tube Configuration and Operation Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide UNIT 2 IP Default router 255 255 255 255 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 2 51 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface S1 Type E3 Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube ConfirmRemoteAlive On Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Dynamic
181. ination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Network T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 T1 ports IPTube B T1 Clocking Network Example co int Host Name IPTube B Host Location Site B Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 54 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 51 24 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 1 T1 port Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDP
182. ing Internal V2PLL or PLL settings this shows that the device attached to this serial interface is not following the clocking provided by the IP Tube The clock is running faster than the IP Tube Receive Negative Slips This is a data error not shown in any other error statistic When this error occurs there is a possibility that up to two T1 or E1 frames are lost When the IP Tube is set for Clocking Internal V2PLL or PLL settings this shows that the device attached to this serial interface is not following the clocking provided by the IP Tube The clock is running slower than the IP Tube Transmit Buf Queue Depth The number of packets in the serial transmit queue Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Appendix IP Tube DL G RS530 V 35 Specifications Ethernet Port 10 100 Base T Full Half Ethernet LAN Protocol TCP UDP ICMP e Assured Delivery Protocol Tube Protocols Engage IP Tube Circuit Extension Over IP e HDLC Over IP 557 Over IP Serial InterfacesOptional e T1 fractionalT1 DSU CSU Elf fractionalE1 DSU CSU Optional RS530 DCE DTE DB 25 female Optional V 35 DCE DTE DB 25 female Power Supply External 24 Volts AC 1Amp with standard AC plug International power supplies available Physical Standard 19 inch rack mount kit available Dimensions 9 0 x 7 3 x 1 63 inches e Weight approximately 2 Ibs excluding external power adapter T1 Specifications One
183. ing manner Clock Master Connected to the S1 Interface Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock NETWORK Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock INTERNAL Clock Master Connected to the S2 Interface or the S1 Interface of a Remote IP Tube Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock TEL2 Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock NETWORK 23 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide IP Tube as Clock Master Local IP Tube Master Clocking Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock TEL2 Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock INTERNAL Remote IP Tube Interface S1 T1 E1 PassThruClock TEL2 Interface S2 T1 E1 PassThruClock NETWORK Link Protector The Link Protector Option provides an automatic T1 E1 over IP back up for T1 E1 circuits The Link Protector detects a failed T1 E1 circuit and re routes the traffic over the IP network The Link Protector Option is configured and operates in the same manner as the Switch Option with the following additions For the IP Tube G product S1 PassThru interface is S2 and S3 PassThru interface is S4 To prevent confussion the manual will discuss operation using the S1 and S2 interfaces Interface S3 and S4 will operate just as S1 and S2 respectively PassThru ProtectiveSwitch The PassThru ProtectiveSwitch configuration parameter determines whether the switch to the IP network is automatic or manual When PassThru ProtectiveSwitch is Manual the Link Protector behaves in the same manner as the
184. is a program which uses ICMP echo request message to check if the speci fies IP address is accessible from the current host Port A Destination point used by transport level protocols to distinguish among multiple destinations within a given host computer SubNet Address An extension of the IP addressing scheme which enables an IP site to use a single IP address for multiple physical networks Subnetting is applicable when a network grows beyond the number of hosts allowed for the IP address class of the site TCP Transmission Control Protocol ensures reliable sequential delivery of data TCP at each end of the connection ensures that the data is delivered to the application accurately sequential completely and free of duplicates The application passes a stream of bytes to TCP which breaks it into pieces adds a header forming a segment and then passes each segment to IP for transmission Telnet The TCP IP standard protocol for remote terminal connection service A user can telnet from the local host to a host at a remote site UDP User Datagram Protocol provides simple efficient protocol which is connectionless and thus unreli able The IP address contained in the UDP header is used to direct the datagram to a specific desti nation host Well Known Port Any set of port numbers reserved for specific uses vy transport level protocols TCP amp UDP Well known ports exist for echo servers time servers telnet and FTP
185. is set to Internal the TUBE INTERVAL is set to 0 TUBE Percentage is set to 100 TUBE BUFFER is set to 0 and the TUBE FPP is not used Note HDLC relevant to the IP Tube is the Bit stuffing synchronous serial framing proctocol HDLC SDLC that utilizes the frame delimeter flag Ox7E HDLC is used to by the Point to Point Protocol Frame Relay Cisco s HDLC WAN protocol and a variety of synchronous serial DTEs The interconnect of DTEs that require that every bit is clocked in and out is supported with the In terface S1 Protocol of IP Tube and CESoIP One method to make sure that the IPe Tube RS530 V35 does not get overrun is to eliminate buffering delay by having the SCRCLOCK set to a slightly higher data rate than the SCTCLOCK The SCRCLOCK must not exceed the maximum clocking rate of the DTE A minor amount of SCR clock gapping will occur For example have the SCRCLOCK FACTOR one greater than the SCTCLOCK FACTOR This method also tolerates network congestion In general only Video Codecs have an issue with gapping of the clocks WAN routers and Synchro nous Encryptors tolerate gapping of the clocks Encryptors though are sensitive to long clock gaps when they are using time sensitive Synchronization techniques with each other as the start of a synch pattern is received and is timed out if not completed within a certain amount of time In the case where SCTCLOCK and SCRCLOCK must be identical and without gapping just as presented by the T1
186. it Drain Drops check the clocking con figuration on both IP Tubes One IP Tube E1 T1 Clocking should be Internal or Network and the other should be V2PLL Improper configuration of the T1 E1 clocking will result in an overrun or underrun condition which causes T1 E1 periodic frame losses One of the IP Tubes must be the master clock source or locked onto a master and the remote end unit uses a Phase Lock Loop circuit to match the master s T1 clock frequency In the case where an IP Tube is being connected to a T1 line from the Telephone com pany the IP Tube connected to the Telco T1 line must be set to 1 Clocking Network and the remote unit set to TT Clocking V2PLL Packets Out Of Sequence indicates an expected packet did not arrive at the Ethernet Interface Usu ally this indicates a problem with the Ethernet interface of the local or remote tube or a problem with the IP network TCP IP Connection An IP Ping program is the best tool for troubleshooting TCP IP connectivity As a sanity check first ensure you can ping the local router If unsuccessful go back to Can t Communicate with the Local IP Tube section Can t IP Ping Remote IP Tube Cause Ping workstation does not have Default Gateway or Router set In the workstation s IP con figuration alongside workstation s own IP address and subnet mask you must provide the IP address of the device a router to which all packets destined off the local net should be sent Caus
187. kets for transmission over Ethernet adds overhead due to the Ethernet IP and UDP headers a total of 44 bytes This 44 byte overhead is a very small per rcentage of the 1000 byte packet payload that it does not need to be taken into account when consid ering Ethernet bandwidth utilization The IPTubeE3 utilizes 5 more than the clock rate of 34 368 Megabits of the Packet network IP Tube Cabling LAN The IP Tubes use standard 10 100BaseT Ethernet cabling to connect to an Ethernet switch E3 The E3 uses 75 ohm coaxial connectors for the Transmit and Receive signals Transmit is the ouput and Receive is the input 195 Chapter 10 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide Status LEDs In addition to the standard LEDs for the serial interface there are three additional LEDs for the E3 ALOS Analog Loss of Signal When the incoming E3 signal falls below the acceptable threshold level DLOS Digital Loss of Signal Occurs when a string of 175 consecutive zeros occur on the line RLOL Receive Loss of Lock When the receiver has detected a loss of lock condition 196 Chapter 10 IP Tube Configuration and Operation Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide E3 EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION Firmware 64 72 xx UNIT 1 IP Default router 255 255 255 255 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off Interface LAN1 Autonegot
188. l and the other to PLL The SCR CLOCK will be set to run at the same speed as the SCTCLOCK without gapping so that buffering of packets is required and the Frames Per Packet is set to the maximum for maximum efficiency For this example the user will select Frames Per Packet 20 With this TUBE FPP setting the Overhead Table in Chapter 6 indicates an approximate 3 496 ratio is 1 034 overhead IP Tube Ethernet Data rate is 1 034 times 1 536 Mbps Command Line Listing Host Name IPTube 530 IP Default router Interface E1 IP Address of this IP Tube IP Address 192 168 1 1 24 Interface S1 Type RS 530 SCR Normal SCT Normal Protocol IPTube Tube On IP Address of the Remote IP Tube Tube Address 192 168 1 2 Tube TOS 0x08 Tube FPP 16 97 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Example 12 IP Tube V 35 HDLC Tube Clock Internal Tube SCRCLOCK MODE NX64K Tube SCRCLOCK FACTOR 24 Tube SCTCLOCK MODE NX64K Tube SCTCLOCK FACTOR 24 Tube Buffer 10 Tube Interval 0 Tube Percentage 100 Scenario This sample configuration details the interconnection of a WAN Routers running Point to Point Protocol via IP TubeV 35s that are providing smooth clocking at a rate of 128 Kilobits per second The IPTube s Ethernet interconnection has a committed information rate that is much greater than the IPTube s maximum data rate Therefore the Ethernet bandwidth available is relatively unlimited T
189. l rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 228 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide 8 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
190. lated in a single IP UDP packet The maximum allowable BytesPerPacket is 1460 The minimum is a function of the clock speed of the line This is calculated to be clock speed 32000 1 rounded up to a multiple of 4 except in the case of NX300 which can be any number The BytePerPacket must be a multiple of 4 except in the case of NX300 which can be any number Examples e 2400bps Minimum BytesPerPacket 4 54Kbps Minimum BytesPerPacket 4 e 64Kbps Minimum BytesPerPacket 4 e 100Kbps Minimum BytesPerPacket 8 e 2 048Mbps NX64K Factor 32 Minimum BytesPerPacket 68 e 12 8Mbps NX3P2 Factor 4 Minimum BytesPerPacket 404 Other Important Calcualtions Calculating IP Packet Delay Bytes Per Packet 8 Frequency Calculating IP Frequency per second 1 IP Packet Delay Calculating IP Tube Latency one way Bytes Per Packet 8 Buffers Frequency Tube RTSextend On Off Tube CTSextend On Off Tube DCDextend On Off Tube DTRextend On Off Tube DSRextend On Off The RTS CTS DCD DTR and DSR extend parameters offer psuedo wire extension of these signals The parameter for a particular signal must be turned On at both the local and remote units Circuit extension of these signals make sense only when one unit is a DCE unit and the other is a DTE unit Circuit extension is valid only for Mode Sync and Protocols IPTube and ADPIPTube 160 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communi
191. le 7 Assured Delivery Protocol Internal Clocking e e with 2 LAN ports and 4 Serial ports Rate Limiter is set to 3 the Spanning Tree protocol is turned off Assured Delivery Protocol is being utilized all serial ports are set to TYPE T1 no compression capabilty SNMP is turned off GT1 Dual LAN Ports Four Active Serial Ports with Rate Limiter 78 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide autonegotiation is turned on e Telnet is turned on so the administrator can access the IP Tube unit remotely via the network BroadcastRCV is turned on for both LAN ports is turned on for all 4 serial ports serial ports are set to T1Framed to coincide with the T1 circuits or CSU DSU s that are connected to these ports e Full T1 s of Service is set to it s highest priority 8 Buffers are set to 5 packets and Frames Per Packet are set to 16 on both serial ports see the appendix for the timing this configuration derives Master clocking is set to network so the unit will derive it s timing from the T1 e the T1 s are configured to match the incoming T1 s parameters This unit is set up with Engage s Rate Limiter feature which will control the flow of data output of the LAN2 port You will notice that 2 T1 s are set to output on LAN2 to take advantage of this feature The Rate Limit parameter is set to 20 In this exam
192. licates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Ox7F E1 Channels Full 88 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide Example 9 Dual 10 100BaseT Fractional E 1s Network Clocking Scenario e with 2 LAN ports and 4 Serial ports serial ports are set to TYPE E1 this system is using Fractional E1 s e SNMP is turned off autonegotiation is turned on thereby eliminating the need to set duplex and speed pa rameters Telnet is turned on so the administrator can access the IP Tube unit remotely via the network BroadcastRCV is turned on for both LAN ports the serial ports are set to E1Framed to coincide with the E1 circuits or CSU DSU s that are connected to these ports e of Service is set to it s highest priority 8 e Buffers are set to 20 packets and Frames Per Packet are set to 56 on both serial ports see the appendix for the timing this configuration derives e Master clocking is set to Network so the unit will derive it s timing from the E1 e the E1 s are configured to match the incoming E1 s Master Unit config Host Contact TestUnit Host Location TestPlace IP Default 000 000 000 000 Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 51
193. lid host key Do not enter a pass phrase SSHD Stopped A brief transient state when SSHD is stopped during a configuration save operation SSHD Running No active session The SSHD Server is running and ready to accept incoming connections but no session is currently active SSHD Running Session active An SSH session is currently active 130 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Config Interface Commands Configuration of the IP Tube DLT1 DLE1 models involves setting parameters for the Ethernet inter faces LAN1 and LAN2 and the Serial interfaces 51 and 52 which may be T1 or E1 interfaces The user must specify which interface is being configured with the command INTERFACE LAN2 S1 S2 Configuration of the IPe Tube GT1 GE1 involves setting parameters for the Ethernet interfaces LAN1 and LAN2 and the Serial interfaces S1 S2 S3 S4 which may be T1 or E1 interfaces The user must specify which interface is being configured with the command INTERFACE LAN1 LAN2 S1 S2 S3 S4 Configuration of the RS530 RS232 and V35 models include configuring the device port and the eth ernet port Specify the port to be configred with the command INTERFACE 1 LAN1 To move up one level from Interface Config mode to Config mode enter the INTERFACE com mand with no argument To change between interfaces whether or not in Interface Config mode specif
194. lock rate from 64K to 2048K as multiples of 64k NXAM clock rate from 4M to 16M as multiples of 4M NX5M clock rate from 5M to 10M as multiples of 5M e NX8M clock rate from 8M to 16M as multiples of 8M TUBE SCRCLOCK FACTOR value DIVIDEBY value The TUBE SCRCLOCK FACTOR with DIVIDEBY added will allow the user to take one of the above possible frequencies and divide it by this factor The DIVIDEBY factor must be an EVEN number This setting will be applied to BOTH SCR and SCT clock settings e DivideBy Minimum factor is 2 e DivideBy Maximum factor is 32 To turn off the DIVIDEBY function symply do not enter the text after SCRCLOCK FACTOR value 173 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide Example TUBE SCxCLOCK MODE NX64K Since the IP Tubes are used to interconnect DTEs across Ethernet which does not provide a com mon clock an application appropriate method needs to be used to ensure that the clocking of the data out of one DTE and into the other DTE is not overrun or underrun Latency and overhead for the connection of data networks needs to be taken into account The simplest scenario is when the Tube s Interface protocol selection is HDLCoIP which is used to interconnect data networks encapsulates the HDLC frames into packets and only requires that the SCTs and SCRs are configured to the desired data rate The TUBE CLOCK at each end
195. lossary 236 Terms and Concepts 236 General Networking Terms 236 TCP IP Networking Terms 237 Communication Link Definitions 238 Other Terms 238 Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction The IP Tube User s Guide provides the information users require to install and operate the IP Tube family of products developed and manufactured by Engage Communication Inc The use of Engage IP Tube systems requires one IP Tube at each end of an IP connection Cable connections and the setting of configuration variables are needed to install the IP Tubes IPeTube Family The IP Tube DLT1 DLE1 models encapsulate from one to two full and fractional T1 E1 and TDM circuits along with their framing and signaling bits into IP packets The IP Tube GT1 GE1 models encapsulate from one to four full and fractional 1 or E1 and TDM circuits along with their framing and signaling bits into IP packets The IP Tube model encapsulate from one full circuit along with its framing and signaling bits into IP packets The IP Tube s TDM Over IP connection provides for the transparent interconnection of PBXs ACD s and other Telecom switches and T1 E1 or based communication systems via LANs WANs MANS and Wireless Ethernet interconnects The IP Tube RS530 LS HS IP Tube RS232 and IP Tube V35 LS HS models encapsulate synchro nous serial data from Data Terminal Equipment DTE or Data Communication Equipment DCE such as Encryptors Terminal
196. ls the port type protocol type port state buffer count etc STATISTICS Lists the packets received and transmitted errors etc SHOW ROUTER Provides general configuration and status information including the Ethernet hardware addresses 127 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide and the firmware version SHOW IP STATISTICS Provides more detailed statistics on IP packets only SHOW CONFIG ALL Provides a list of all configuration parameters No argument is the same as ALL This list provides the basis for storing an IP Tube configuration into a local text file The full configuration can be edited in a text editor for simple cut and paste configuration of the unit SHOW CONFIG INTERFACE LAN1 LAN2 S1 S2 S3 54 If no interface is specified either the current interface per the interface command will be used or all interfaces will be shown SHOW CONFIG IP ALL Details the IP configuration No argument is the same as ALL which provides configuration items which don t pertain to a specific port i e default router gateway etc SHOW CONFIG ROUTER Lists IP Tube Hostname IP Address etc SHOW SSHD INFO Use the Show Info or Show SSHD Info to determine the state of the SSHD Server LAN Interface Statistics Packets Received The number of LAN packets received Receive CRC The packet had a CRC error Receive Overrun Overrun of internal FIFO used in transf
197. lt in synchronization mode limitations The clock gapping delay can be reduced by reducing the FPP overhead impact and the SCTCLOCK base rate latency impact which is set to maximum in this example TUBE INTERVAL xx TUBE PERCENTAGE The TUBE PERCENTAGE parameter in conjunction with the SCxCLOCK MODE FACTOR and TUBE INTERVAL setting controls the transmit SCT and receive SCR clocking on the RS 530 V 35 serial interface A detailed discussion of data bandwidth and clock rate and how TUBE FPP TUBE INTERVAL and TUBE PERCENTAGE settings affect them can be found in Chapter 6 IP Tube Configuration amp Operation 11 Chapter 2 Installation QuickStart Chapter 3 Installation of the IP Tube This chapter provides details on the physical connections required for the installation of Engage IP Tube equipment and the initial communication with the IP Tube via the console port References are made to the Configuration and Operation of the IP Tube as well as to the Command Line Interface CLI These topics are covered in detail in later chapters Installation Requirements The use of Engage IP Tube systems to create a TDM over IP or SynchronousData over IP connec tion requires one IP Tube at each end of the IP connection A standard IP Tube package includes P Tube unit with installed WAN interfaces DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 RS530 RS232 V 35 T3 or E3 Console port adapter and cable cross over 1
198. mes per packet settings of the models to which they are being con nected Note Round trip delays in excess of 20 milliseconds may require echo cancellation if the systems do not have integrated echo cancellation or the links are digital end to end The amount of delay can be calculated based on the TUBE FPP and the TUBE BUFFERS settings The IP Tube DLT1 E1 Ecan and GT1 E1 Ecan are versions with an integrated Echo Cancellation option Note Echo Cancellation is not field upgradable must be ordered at time of purchase LAN Interface The IP Tube DLT1 GT1 DLE1 GE1 RS530LS RS530HS RS232 V 35LS V 35HS models feature two 10 100BaseT full half duplex Ethernet interfaces for connection to IP interconnects The IP Tube UNO model feature a single 10 100BaseT full half duplex Ethernet interfaces for connec tion to IP interconnects The IP Tube G4 model featuture a 10 100BaseT full half duplex Ethernet switch There are five Eth ernet ports available ETH1 ETH5 Four of which are connected together as a switch LAN1 ETH1 ETH3 ETH5 The remaining port is seperate LAN2 ETH2 WAN Interface T1 interfaces offer an integrated T 1 fractional T1 DSU CSU for direct connection to dedicated or frame relay services at speeds up to 1 544 Mbps E1 interfaces offer an integrated E1 fractional E1 DSU CSU for direct connection to dedicated or frame relay services at speeds up to 2 048 Mbps RS 530 models have a synchronous serial interface for intercon
199. mmunication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Hex E1 TxUnderrunAIS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 E1 ports E1IP Tube Generic Example B Unit B config interface Host Name IPTube B Host Location Site B Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 51 24 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 35 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Hex E1 TxUnderrunAIS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 1 E1 port Interface S2 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Lo
200. mode to Config mode enter the INTERFACE command with no argument To change between interfaces when in Interface Config mode specify the new interface For example name s1 INTERFACE LAN1 Syntax for Command Parameters one of the parameters in set is required one of the parameters in set is allowed optional 124 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Show Config All The SHOW CONFIG ALL command provides the means to store and replay an entire configuration Using a cut and paste operation configurations may be edited off line stored and used later to con figure the IP Tube unit System Level or General Commands CONFIG Enter the configuration mode with the command CONFIG at which point the following commands may be used SAVE Save the changes and exit Configuration mode END SAVE Exit Configuration mode The optional SAVE instructs the IP Tube to save configuration changes RESTORE Restores the current IP Tube configuration ignoring any changes which have been made during the current Telnet CONFIG session PASSWD Allows setting or modifying the login password The IP Tube ships with no password set Upon enter ing the PASSWD command the user is prompted to enter and confirm the new password BYE QUIT LOGOUT Any of these commands will terminate the Telnet session If you have unsaved configuration changes you will be prompted to save or dis
201. mples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 50 24 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter 7F Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 1 E1 port Interface S2 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter 7F Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full 43 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide copy to here for 2 E1 ports Interface S3 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube F
202. munication IP Tube User s Guide RS 530 Port Specification The IP Tube RS 530 Interface when configured as a DCE Data Communication Equip ment interface provided via a DB25 female connector DB25 Pin No Signal Name Shield Table 9 RS530 DCE Port Specification 218 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide RS 530 Port Specification The IP Tube RS 530 Interface when configured as a DTE Data Terminal Equipment interface provided via a DB25 female connector DB25 Pin No Signal Name Shield TD A RD A Table 10 RS530 DTE Port Specification 219 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide RS 232 Port Specification The IP Tube RS 232 Interface has a DCE Data Communication Equipment interface provided via a DB25 female connector DB25 Pin No Signal Name Shield Table 11 RS232 Port Specification 220 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide RS 232 Port Specification The IP Tube RS 232 Interface when configured as a DTE Data Terminal Equipment interface provided via a DB25 female connector DB25 Pin No Signal Name Shield TD A RD A
203. n Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter 7F Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 1 E1 port Interface S2 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off 45 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 2 E1 ports Interface S3 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter 7F Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 3 E1 ports Interface S4 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube
204. n 192 168 2 53 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off Interface S4 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Ox7F E1 Channels Full Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery On E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter E1 Channels Full Slave Unit config Host Contact Test Tube Host Location Test Lab IP Default 000 000 000 000 Spanning On RateLimit 3 Telnet On User Off 86 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 53 24 IP Def 192 168 2 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 54 24 IP Def 192 168 2 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 2 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 2 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube F
205. n IN3 changes from a LOW to a HIGH OUTS will follow at the remote location Pinout of PIO port INPUT Pins 4 5 6 8 OUTPUT Pins 14 15 16 17 RS Control Signal Extension The RTS CTS DCD DTR and DSR extend parameters offer psuedo wire extension of these signals The parameter for a particular signal must be turned On at both the local and remote units Circuit extension of these signals make sense only when one unit is a DCE unit and the other is a DTE unit Circuit extension is valid only for Mode Sync and Protocols IPTube and ADPIPTube Tube RTSextend On Off Tube CTSextend On Off Tube DCDextend On Off Tube DTRextend On Off Tube DSRextend On Off Debug When the unit is in DCE mode Interface S1 RX will acculmlate packets if Sense DTR DSR is set to OFF Interface S1 RX packets will increase even without the serial cable attached 184 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Chapter 8 IP gt Tube SER RS530 AutoProtect This chapter provides operational theory and configuration details specific to the SER RS530 AutoProtect feature Theory of Operation AutoProtect provides a fully redundant IP Tube backup between a pair of IP Tubes This is done by having Primary and Secondary IP Tubes at a local location and another Primary and Secondary set at the remote site Serial data and clocking are provided through a data Y cable to both Primary and Seconda
206. n between IP Tube systems uses packets destined for a configurable UDP port num ber The IP Tube defaults to UDP port 3175 IP Tube Buffers TUBE BUFFERS nn As IP UDP packets are received at the IP Tube Ethernet interface they are buffered prior to the en abling of the T1 E1 transmitter This provides for elasticity The TUBE BUFFERS setting permits the user to configure the number of packets buffered with valid settings from 3 to 85 A large value provides greater elasticity but can introduce significant delay The amount of delay can be calculated from the T1 E1 data rate the TUBE FPP setting below and the TUBE BUFFERS setting See Chapter 5 IPe Tube Configuration and Operation for an analysis of how IP Tube settings contribute to the overall round trip delay or latency Note Round trip delays in excess of 20 milliseconds may require Echo Cancellation ECAN is not field upgradeable IP Tube Frames Per Packet TUBE FPP nn Specifies the number of frames received on the T1 E1 RS530 V35 interface to be encapsulated in a single IP UDP packet The size of the serial interface frame depends on the interface provided to the IP Tube 1 frame size is 192 bits 1 framing bit depends on T1Framing config E1frame size is 256 bits RS530 V 35 frame size is 512 bits 64 bytes 7 Chapter 2 Installation QuickStart Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Low latency applications such as voice require minimum Frames P
207. n the LAN WAN interconnection Clocking and Bandwidth IP Tube RS530DL RS530HS RS232 X 21 V 35 The IP Tube RS530 RS232 and IP Tube V 35 products when configured as Data Communica tion Equipment DCE s provide the clocking to their attached Data Terminal Equipment DTE s SCTCLOCK is used to clock Transmit Data from the DTE and package them into IP packets that are sent to the interface S1 s TUBE ADDRESS the destination unit SCRCLOCK is used to clock the Receive Data Ethernet packet data from the buffer memory into the DTE In order to take into account the variety of desired data rates bandwidth and latency requirements involved in interconnecting DTE across Ethernet IP networks the IP gt TubeRS530 and IP TubeV35 clocking options are very flexible The latest IPe Tube RS530 RS232 V35s utilize a Core Clock circuit which can be configured to a fixed frequency or as an adaptive PLL to provide the clocking to independently configurable Serial Clock Receive and Serial Clock Transmit base rate clocks The Core Clock circuit is set for Internal or PLL with the TUBE CLOCK command Example TUBE CLOCK INTERNAL The SCR and SCT base clocks are configured with the TUBE SCxCLOCK MODE command which has settings of NX2K4 NX56K or NX64K and is multiplied by SCxCLOCK FACTOR to produce the base SCxCLOCK NX2KA clock rate from 2 4K to 43 2K as multiples of 2 4k NX56K clock rate from 56K to 1792K as multiples of 56k NX64K c
208. nName Interface S1 Type T3 Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube ConfirmRemoteAlive On Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Buffers 5 Tube Duplicates 0 T3 Clocking PLL 190 Chapter 9 IP Tube Configuration and Operation Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide UNIT 2 IP Default router 255 255 255 255 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On 8021q Off DHCPClient Off IP Address 192 168 2 51 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING DDNS Off OurDomainName Interface S1 Type T3 Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube ConfirmRemoteAlive On Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 0xB8 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Buffers 5 Tube Duplicates 0 T3 Clocking Internal 191 Chapter 9 IP Tube Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide Legacy IP Tub
209. name into Filter Name Click Expression In the popup box Field Name click the next to UDP click udp dstport click In Value type the port number you want 3175 for S1 3176 for S2 Click OK Click OK in the Display Filter box When the capture is redisplayed click on a Tube packet Click Analyze gt Decode As Select Decode Select Transport gt UDP destination 3175 Select SCTP in the rightmost box Click OK After redisplay click on Protocol in the top subwindow Scroll along the packets to find the MTP3MG protocol packets In the Source field is the Originating Point Code in hexadecimal and the Destination field is the Destination Point Code in hexadecimal 164 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Chapter 6 IP Tube DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 UNO G4 Configu ration amp Operation This chapter provides operational theory and configuration details specific to the IP Tube DL UNO and G4 models for T1 s and E1 s With built in DSU CSU interfaces these models have unique requirements regarding timing clocking and their interface to other T1 E1 equipment Note The main difference between the IP Tube DL and IP Tube G models are as follows e IP Tube DLT1 DLE1 models have two 10 100BaseT interfaces and two serial ports IP Tube GT1 GE1 models also have two 10 100BaseT interfaces and use the same configuration for the ports except there are four serial ports available IP Tube UNO models have either a
210. ncapsulated E1 DSU CSU Parameters The following E1 parameters must match the configuration of the E1 interface to which it is connect ed The E1 clock setting is dependent upon the source of the E1 Clock Interface S1 Type E1 E1 Mode Term Monitor E1 Data Normal Invert E1 Clocking X Internal Network V2PLL PLL GPS OCXO GPSBackupOCXO E1 Framing CRC4 FAS Unframed E1 Coding HDB3 AMI E1 IdleCharacter OxNN E1 Channels Full Fractional Starting DSO Number of DSOs Note When more then one group or single channels not contiguous hyphens and commas can be used to list all groups and individual channels Note E1 Clocking GPS OCXO and GPSBackupOCXO is only available for the IP Tube G4 as an upgradable options T1 E1 Clocking Considerations 167 Chapter 6 IPPeTube DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 UNO G4 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide Improper configuration of T1 E1 clocking will result in an overrun or underrun condition which causes T1 E1 frame losses of the IP Tube systems must be the master clock source or locked onto a T1 E1 clock and the remote end unit uses a Phase Lock Loop circuit to match the master s T1 E1 clock frequency In the case where the IP Tube systems are being connected to a T1 E1 line from the Telephone company the IP Tube connected to the Telco T1 E1 must be set to T1 E1 Clocking Network and the remote unit set to Clocking
211. nceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU OdB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Interface S3 Type E1 Protocol ADPIPTube Protocol ADPIPTube DelayRetransmit 5 Protocol ADPIPTube LimitRetransmit 2 Protocol ADPIPTube CountRetransmit 1 Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing E1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 80 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off Interface S4 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Type T1 Protocol ADPIPTube DelayRetransmit 5 Protocol ADPIPTube LimitRetransmit 2 Protocol ADPIPTube CountRetransmit 1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery On T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 Channels Full Slave Unit config Host Contact Test Tube Host Location Test Lab IP Default 192
212. nd Operation for a complete description of the overhead associated with encapsualtion of T1 E1 frames into IP packets 116 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide Command Line Listing HostName IPTube T1 IP Default router Interface E1 IP Address of this IP Tube IP Address 192 168 1 1 24 Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Reception Control BroadcastRCV ON Interface S1 Type T1 Tube Parameters Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Framing T1Framed IP Address of remote IP Tube Tube Address 192 168 1 2 Tube Destination Ethernet Address Resolution Tube TOS 08 Hex TubeUDPPORT 3175 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 8 Tube Compression Off Tube Ethernet Arp On Tube Ethernet Address 1 Parameters T1 Data Normal 1 Transmit timing set to Phase Lock Loop 1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU OdB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7F T1 Channels Full Example 2 IPeTubeDLT1 Fractional T1 8 0505 without T1 Framing Bits Scenario This sample configuration details an IP Tube interconnect of a fractional T1 without framing bits DSO 1 through 8 are transported This IP Tube is set to internal timing as the master clock of the IP Tube s T1 connection The remote IP Tube must be set to use its Phase Lock Loop to match this frequency Note the remote IP Tube is across a WAN whose IP address range is 192 168 2 x The WAN router address is 192 168 1 4 this is t
213. nection to routers encryptors video codecs etc via a DB25 connector RS 232 models have a synchronous serial interface for interconnection to routers encryptors video codecs etc via a DB25 connector V 35 models have a synchronous serial interface for interconnection to routers encryptors video codecs etc via a DB25 connector About this Guide Organization Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of the IP Tube User s Guide Chapter 2 QuickStart provides concise configuration examples to get the experienced user up and running in a minimum amount of time Chapter 3 Installation covers the physical environment and connections required when installing the 2 Chapter 1 Introduction Engage Communication User s Guide IP Tube It also includes explanations of the Status LED s and descriptions of the ADP Protector and Switch features Chapter 4 Configuration Examples is a collection of the more common configurations for various models and feature sets These samples can be cut and pasted into the user interface as a shortcut in the configuration of IP Tube units Chapter 5 Command Line Reference provides a command by command description of the Engage CLI Chapter 6 DLT1 E1 GT1 E1 UNO G4 Configuration and Operation discusses the initial configura tion and ongoing operation of the IP Tube DLT1 E1 GT1 E1 UNO and G4 models A discussion on bandwidth and data rate issues is included Cha
214. net Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S3 Type V 35 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 50 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3277 Tube 2 TOS 0xB8 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On 112 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S4 Type V 35 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock Internal Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 DynamicAddress Off Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 50 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3278 Tube 2 TOS 0xB8 Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube 2 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Slave Unit Config for IP Tube SER RS530 DCE PLL Clo
215. network failure but increases the possibility of failing over on a transient network event Conversely setting a higher value of PollingPeriod increases the time to fail over but decreases the possibility of failing over on a transient network event The PollingPeriod is specified in terms of seconds The range of values is from 1 to 60 TUBE PROTECTOR QUALIFICATION NN Qualification determines the length of time the Protector evaluates the quality of the LAN1 link and makes a determination whether to switch back from LAN2 to LAN1 The Protector switches back to LAN1 if LAN1 met its failover criteria over the Qualification period The Protector also switches back to LAN1 if failover ciriteria statistics are worse for LAN2 than LAN1 over the Qualification period even if LAN1 did not meet its criteria Qualification is specified in terms of minutes The range of values is from 1 to 10 20 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide TUBE PROTECTOR RXOUTOFSEQUENCE NN RxOutOfSequence is failover criteria representing IP Tube packets received OutOfSequence Pack ets out of sequence can be due to missing packets or packet re ordering by the network The range of values is from 5 to 200 If in a PollingPeriod received packets OutOfSequence exceeds RxOutOfSequence the Protector fails over from LAN1 to LAN2 If in a Qualification time received packets out of sequence do not exceed RxOutOfSequence the P
216. ng the tables in Chapter 7 indicate an approximate 7 ratio is 1 069 overhead The WAN Point to Point Protocol overhead is off set with the Ethernet MAC addresses not being transported across the WAN link although the HDLC framing does bit stuffing that could bump the 10 Chapter 2 Installation QuickStart Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide data bandwidth by 8 So the total overhead is 7 for the IP UDP plus 8 for bit stuffing Therefore the desired clock rate on RS530 is 64Kbps 1 15 55Kbps In order to minimize the latency involved in clocking the data from the encrypter s serial interface the encrypter will be clocked at its maximum rate and the Tube Interval setting will be used to hold off clocking the next packet of data until the ISDN WAN router has been able to transmit the prior packet To determine the Tube Interval setting take the maximum clocking rate of the DTE divide it by the data rate and subtract one The encrypter s maximum clocking rate is 2 048Mbps Divisor 2 048 000 55 000 37 2 Round down 2 048 000 37 55 351 Note Slightly greater clocking rate is okay since bit stuffing of 8 is worst case of every data byte being stuffed Interval Divisor minus 1 36 Note The time of clock gapping equals FPP BytePerFrame BitsPerByte 2 048Mbps times Interval FPP 10 BPP 64 SCRCLOCK 55 351 Interval 36 10 64 8 2 048 000 36 0 09 90 milliseconds This amount of gap can resu
217. nnected data terminal equipment DTE The IP Tube RS 530 RS232 V 35 provides configuration commands to set these two clocks for normal operation or they can be inverted in cases that the DTE to which the IP Tube connects requires it Note Serial interface does not check for CRC or regenerate CRC when running HDLCOIP Example SCR NORMAL SCT NORMAL IP Tube destination address is set to the IP address of the remote IP Tube Example TUBE ADDR 172 16 0 222 Note Loopback of the RS 530 RS232 or V 35 data occurs when the destination address is the same as the IP address of the Ethernet interface of the IP Tube The SENSEDTRDSR command determines whether the IP Tube is sensitive to the DTR signal in the case of IP Tube DCE or the DSR signal in the case of IP Tube DTE When SENSEDTRDSR is ON the IP Tube will send IP packets with encapsulated data only when the DTR IP Tube DCE or DSR IP Tube DTE signal is asserted When SENSEDTRDSR is OFF the IP Tube ignores the DTR or DSR signal and sends IP packets with encapsulated data SENSEDTRDSR ON OFF Enable or Disable DTR Sensitivity on a Serial Port for IPe Tube DCE Enable or Disable DSR Sensitivity on a Serial Port for IP Tube DTE Note IP Tube DTR DSR Sensitivity is AVAILABLE ONLY ON REV LEVEL 20 85 28 MODELS TOS QoS and UDP Port Number The IP Tube TOS command is used to control the Type of Service Byte in the IP packets containing the encapsulated serial data The setting of t
218. nstallation Engage Communication User s Guide receive valid frames from other equipment via the T1 E1 line the RD will be off When the communication processor recognizes the port ENA will show a stead GREEN For correct framing status LNK will indicate a steady GREEN IP Tube RS530 RS232 V 35 models Ethernet IP Tube RS530 RS232 and V 35 models provide specific information with EthTx and EthRx indica tors providing status on packet transmission and receipt respectively on the Ethernet interface When receiving the RD will show a steady GREEN When transmitting the TD will show a steady GREEN Serial Interfaces IP Tube RS530 RS232 and V 35 models provide RD and TD LED s which indicate packet receipt and transmission respectively on the serial interface When receiving packets the RD will show a steady GREEN When transmitting packets the TD will show a steady GREEN Internal Switches IP Tube DL G RS530 RS232 V 35 X 21 and T3 E3 systems contain an internal four position DIP Switch which is accessible by removing the unit rear panel and sliding out the motherboard The default setting for all DIP switches is OFF Switch 1 Power cycling the unit with DIP Switch 1 ON forces the IP Tube all models to return to operating from Base Flash and deleting any downloaded upgrades Ensure Switch 1 is returned to the OFF position after clearing an upgrade so future upgrades can be performe
219. nternet specifying the address of the next router in the path to a given destination network and the distance in hops The router uses the routing table to determine where and whether to forward a packet Each router periodically broadcasts its routing table to other routers on each of its directly connected networks enabling them to compare and update their own tables with the most recent record of con nected networks and routes In this way routing tables are kept current as changes are made on the internet Hop A hop is a unit count between networks on the internet A hop signifies one router away Node Device on the network 236 Engage Communication User s Guide TCP IP Networking Terms FTP File Transfer Protocol gives users the ability to transfer files between IP hosts It uses TCP to provide connection initiation and reliable data transfer Host A computer with one or more uses that can act as an endpoint of communication if it has TCP IP ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol provides a means for intermediate gateways and hosts to commu nicate There are several types of ICMP messages and they are used for several purposes including IP flow control routing table correction and host availability IP Internet Protocol which routes the data IP Datagram The basic unit of the information passed across and IP Internet It contains address information and data PING Packet InterNet Groper
220. ocking from the RS530 Interface Note Only the RS530 Interface supports the selection of DCE or DTE The V 35 and the RS232 interfaces need to be ordered as one or the other SCT NORMAL INVERTED SCR NORMAL INVERTED The IP Tube RS 530 RS232 and V 35 models provide DCE data communication equipment or Data Terminal Equipment DTE interfaces The DCE interface supplies both the Transmit Clock serial clock transmit or SCT and Receive Clock SCR to the connected DTE date terminal equipment interface The IP Tube RS 530 RS232 and V 35 models allow the user to configure these clocks to Normal mode or to Inverted mode The DTE to which the IP Tube connects may require inverted clock TERMINALTIMING ON OFF ON enables the RS530 RS232 serial port receiver to be timed off of the reflected transmit clock 156 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide from the DTE used for high speed apps this only works if the serial ports is a DCE OFF disables the use of the reflected transmit clock TERMINALTIMING INVERT ON OFF ON inverts the logic level of the serial port s reflected transmit clock before clocking the received data requires that termtiming is ON OFF sets normal logic level for the reflected clock TUBE CLOCK INTERNAL PLL The TUBE CLOCK command is used to set the source of the Serial Clock Receive and Transmit Tim ing signals When SCRCLOCK needs to match t
221. ollow the steps below Modify the S1 configuration Set SCR for Normal Set SCT for Inverted Use custom cable See Table Below DB25 male to DB15 male or female depending on application Connect Sig Timing A and to both Rx and Tx pins In Red e Set appropiate X 21 Configuration in the S1 interface Tube X21ControlAndInd OFF Control and Indicatior signals are not passed through tube On Control and Indicatior signals are passed through tube mba 2 2 DA 3 4 RDA DSRA 6 5 INDA Signal Siggd 7 8 GND 9 13 SigTimingB TXCkB 12 13 SigTimigB TDB 14 9 J TXCkA 15 SigTimigA 16 n RDB J Rxcka 17 60 SigTimigA EL _ qp qu e T Umsued Signs Table 4 Custom Cable Pin Out for X 21 operation 181 Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530 RS232 X 21 V 35 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide SER RS530 RS232 V 35 Specific Configurations SCR NORMAL INVERTED The IP Tube RS 530 RS232 and V 35 models provide DCE data communication equipment Data Terminal Equipment DTE interfaces The DCE interface supplies both the Transmit Clock serial clock transmit or SCT and Receive Clock SCR to the connected DTE date terminal equipment interface The IP Tube RS 530 RS232 and V 35 model
222. ommand Line Interface PROTOCOL IPTUBE CESOIP ADPIPTUBE To use ADP specify WAN protocol ADPIPTUBE PROTOCOL ADPIPTUBE DELAYRETRANSMIT NN Specify NN for the delay before the ADPIPTUBE protocol Retransmits an unacknowledged packet The delay is specified in terms of Tube packets PROTOCOL ADPIPTUBE LIMITRETRANSMIT NN Specify NN for the maximum number of unacknowledged packets the ADPIPTUBE protocol Retrans mits after transmitting an IP Tube packet PROTOCOL ADPIPTUBE COUNTRETRANSMIT NN NN specifies the minimum interval expressed in terms of Tube packets before a retransmitted packet is retransmitted again Protector Option The IP Tube Protector offers a failover path to LAN2 if the LAN1 link quality reaches an unacceptable level The link quality is determined by a set of configurable factors When the link quality returns to an acceptable level the IP Tube data path returns to LAN1 18 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide Protector Operation The Protector monitors incoming packets for link quality over a period of time The period of time is specified by Tube Protector PollingPeriod Incoming packets are monitored for percentage of expected packets actually received the number of packets received out of sequence the number of times the serial transmit buffer overflows and the number of times the serial transmit buffer under runs The threshold for each are independently c
223. ompression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On 38 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter OxTf T1 TxUnderrunAIS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 2 T1 ports Interface S3 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter OxTf T1 TxUnderrunAIS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 3 T1 ports Interface S4 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off 39 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 T1 ports
224. on Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 3 T1 ports Interface S4 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 50 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3178 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking V2PLL T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter OxTf T1 TxUnderrunAIS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 4 T1 ports 32 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Example ZB DLE1 Generic E1IP Tube Generic Example 2 Unit A IP TubeA E1IPTube Example config interface Host Name IPTube A Host Location Site A Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 50 24 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 T
225. on active only one allowed or the host key is not valid Use the Client logging facilities to gather information about the failed connection attempt For the OpenSSH client use the vvv option For the SecureCRT client select the Raw Log Options from the File menu 150 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide T1 Echo Canceller T1 ECHOCANCELLER ON OFF Enables or disables echo cancellation ECAN is not field upgradable must be ordered at time of purchase T1 OFFECHOCHANNELS ALL NONE NN XX NN Y Z MM Y 2 Indicates on which channels echo cancellation is disabled ALL disables all channels from echo cancellation NONE enables all channels for echo cancellation To selectively disable individual channels NN is the start channel and XX is the number of channels to be disabled NN and MM are single channels to be disabled and Y Z are a range of channles to be disabled Single channels and ranges are separated by commas and can be combined on a com mand line Alternatively for channels in use that are not contiguous NN and MM are single T1 channels in use and Y Z are a range of T1 channels in use Single channels and ranges are separated by commas and can be combined on the command line For example an ISDN PRI link uses channel 24 for D Channel signaling thus one would want to dis able channel 24 for echo cancellation T1 OFFECHOCHANNELS 24 T1 SIGNALING NONE
226. on address is the same as the IP address of the Ethernet interface of the IP Tube Example TUBE ADDR 172 16 0 222 166 Chapter 6 P Tube DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 UNO G4 Configuration and Operation Engage Communication User s Guide T1 DSU CSU Parameters The IP Tube T1 serial interface number 1 S1 is configured for T1 operation The following T1 pa rameters must match the configuration of the DS1 T1 interface to which it is connected The T1 clock setting is dependent upon the source of the T1 Clock Interface S1 Type T1 T1 Mode Term Monitor T1 Data Normal Invert T1 Clocking Internal Network V2PLL PLL GPS OCXO GPSBackupOCXO T1 LBO CSU OdB 7 5 15 22 5 T1 Framing ESF D4 T1 Coding B8ZS AMI T1 IdleCharacter OxNN T1 Speed 64K T1 Spacing Contiguous T1 Channels Full Fractional Starting DSO Number of DSOs Note When more then one group of channels not contiguous hyphens and commas can be used to list all groups and individual channels Note T1 Clocking GPS OCXO and GPSBackupOCXO is only available for the IP Tube G4 as an upgradable options E1 Parameters The IP Tube E1 parameters are similar to those for T1 except as noted here TUBE FRAMING E1FRAMED TRANSPARENT 1 encapsulates the framing byte along with the DSO data e Transparent Only the data in the selected 0505 is transported in the IP Tube The E1 framing byte is not e
227. onfiguration amp Operation 192 IP Tube Installation Steps 192 System and Ethernet Parameters 192 T3 Parameters 192 T3 Clocking Considerations 192 Latency and Bandwidth Considerations 192 IP Packet Encapsulation Overhead 192 IP Tube Cabling 193 LEGACY T3 EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION Firmware 39 72 xx 193 Chapter 10 194 IP Tube Configuration amp Operation 194 IP Tube Installation Steps 194 System and Ethernet Parameters 194 E3 Parameters 194 E3 Clocking Considerations 194 Latency and Bandwidth Considerations 195 IP Packet Encapsulation Overhead 195 IP Tube Cabling 195 E3 Status LEDs 196 E3 EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION Firmware 64 72 xx 197 LEGACY IP Tube Configuration amp Operation 199 IP Tube Installation Steps 199 System and Ethernet Parameters 199 E3 Parameters 199 E3 Clocking Considerations 199 Latency and Bandwidth Considerations 199 IP Packet Encapsulation Overhead 199 IP Tube Cabling 200 LEGACY E3 EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION Firmware 39 72 xx 200 Chapter 12 201 Troubleshooting 201 Unable to Communicate with the IP Tube 201 Ethernet General 201 High Ethernet Error Count 201 Table of Contents Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Can t Communicate Telnet with IP Tube TCP IP Can t communicate to the IP Tube Console Port T1 E1 Circuit Extension to Remote IP Tube not Functioning Local IP Tube Port 1 LED Remains Blank IP Tube Cabling Interface S1 Configuration IP Tube T1 Interface Framin
228. onfigurations E3 Clocking Considerations Improper E3 clocking will result in an overrun or underrun condition which causes E3 frame losses There are two different clocking schemes The first configuration would have the local unit set for Internal clocking and the remote unit PLL This solution would be used if the IP Tube solution is needed to provide clocking for the circuit Mas ter Circuit Clock The unit set for Internal would be providing the Master Clock and the other unit set for PLL to provide clocking for the remote end The equipment connected to the IP Tubes would need to be set to receive clocking from the IP Tubes The second setup would require one IP Tube set for Network clocking and the remote unit PLL This solution is required when an IP Tube needs to receive clocking from the equipment connected to the E3 interface Master Circuit Clock The unit set for Network would be receive clocking from the E3 interface and pass it along to the remote unit which would be set for PLL to pass clocking to the equipment that is connected to The equipment connected to the Network IP Tube would need to generate clocking and the equipment connected to the PLL unit needs to be set to receive clocking 194 Engage Communication User s Guide E3 CLOCKING INTERNAL NETWORK PLL Determines the source of Transmit Clock TxCk When set to Internal the DSU CSU transmits data at a rate set by an internal oscillator
229. onfigured Example ZA DLT1 Generic 1 1 Generic Example A Unit A config interface Host Name IPTube A Host Location Site A Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 2 50 24 Port Off BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB 28 Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide T1 Framing T1 Coding T1 IdleCharacter T1 TxUnderrunAIS T1 Channels ESF B8ZS Ox7f Off Full copy to here for 1 T1 port Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination Tube 1 UDPPORT Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression 192 168 1 51 3176 Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0dB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7f T1 TxUnderrunAIS Off T1 Channels Full copy to here for 2 T1 ports
230. onfigured If any are exceeded during a PollingPe riod the Protector fails over to LAN2 When failed over to LAN2 the Protector continues to monitor LAN1 If over a period of time specified by Tube Protector Qualification the quality of incoming packets meets all the configured thresholds the IP Tube switches back to LAN1 If the IP Tube loses the link on the LAN1 port i e the cable is pulled the Protector immediately fails over to LAN2 While failed over to LAN2 the Protector monitors LAN1 and LAN2 for the configured thresholds If over a Qualification period of time LAN1 has better link quality than LAN2 the Protector switches back to LAN1 This is done even if LAN1 has not met the threshold criteria Thus the Protector always switches back to if the LAN2 link quality is worse than LAN1 When the Protecter fails over to LAN2 it is only altering its receive path It requests the remote IP Tube Protector to begin transmitting on LAN2 but does not itself begin transmitting on LAN2 It would only do so if the remote IP Tube had determined to fail over and requested the local IP Tube to begin transmitting on LAN2 Thus the Protector on each IP Tube operates in an independant uni directional mode When its LAN receive link quality degrades it asks to receive on a different path The state of the Protector can be determined by displaying the output of the Show Info command The Protector Receive Port is the LAN on which the IP T
231. ot set on IP Tube Transmit Misc Unspecified transmit error not associated with a buffer Transmit Buf Queue Depth Number of Packets in the Queue Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide 208 Here is a sample of the Show Statistics command of a TEL port This is an error log that count the errors that occur on the interface The data will keep until the unit is power cycled or a Clear All com mand is issued to clear the statistics log A description of the errors are below with an explanation of why they may be occurring IP Tube sh s1 stat Interface Errors Packets Received 42797807 Receive CRC S1 Receive Overrun 0 Receive Framing 0 Receive Misc 0 Packets Transmitted 42789443 Transmit CSL Transmit UN 0 Transmit RL 0 Transmit LC 0 Transmit Misc 0 Errors TOTAL Packets Out Of Sequence Last Sequence Disruption Packets Arriving Too Late Packets Not Arriving Packets Rcvd w Bad UDP Port Transmit Drain Drops Receive Positive Slips Receive Negative Slips Transmit Buffer Queue Depth TEL Statistic Data Packets Received Packets Rcvd w Bad Source IP Addr Description Number of serial packets received Received and Transmitted packets should be about the same If they are not the same the packets are not getting to the IP Tube Check serial cabling Make sure the LNK LED is on solid for
232. out the network connections on the device including interface type link status packets transmitted and received AT group contains information about the ARP entries on the device including the values for MAC Ad dress and IP Address for each entry IP group contains IP statistics and configuration on the device including IP packets received packets discarded and IP address and subnet mask ICMP group contains statistics for ICMP statistics including packets sent for redirect port unreach able or echo requests Ping UDP group contains statistics for UDP including packets received and transmitted and packets sent to a UDP port with no listener SNMP group contains statistics for the SNMP protocol including packets received and transmitted error packets and number of set requests For more detail MIB II is fully specified in RFC1213 available at http www faqs org rfcs rfc1213 html The IP Tube GT1 and GE1 support a generation of SNMPv1 Traps Traps are messages sent from the device s LAN port when specific events occur The following traps may be generated coldStart this trap is generated if the Tube re initializes itself after a configuration change 26 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide warmStart this trap is generated if the Tube re initializes itself after a reset which does not involve a configuration change linkUp this trap is generated when a
233. pact which is set to maximum in this example TUBE PERCENTAGE 25 50 75 87 100 The TUBE PERCENTAGE parameter in conjunction with the SCxCLOCK MODE FACTOR TUBE INTERVAL setting controls the transmit SCT and receive SCR clock speeds on the RS 530 V 35 serial interface A detailed discussion of data bandwidth and clock rate and how TUBE FPP TUBE INTERVAL and TUBE PERCENTAGE settings affect them is provided in Chapter 7 IP Tube RS 530DL RS530HS RS232 X 21 V35 and IP Tube SER RS530 RS232 V35 X 21 Function Tube X21ControlAndind On Off Turns on or off the sensing of X21 Control and Indication signals When X21ControlAndlnd is on the state of X21 Control and Indication signals at the local unit are transported to the remote unit and transmitted at the remote interface SER RS530 RS232 and V 35 Specific Configurations TUBE SCRCLOCK MODE NX300 NX2K4 NX56K NX64K NX100K NX3P2M The TUBE SCRCLOCK MODE setting in combination with the SCRCLOCK FACTOR controls the frequency of the Serial DCE interface s Serial Clock Receive To reduce latency when NX300 is selected the internal transmit FIFO is reduced from 32 bytes to 1 byte and the receive FIFO is reduced from 4 to 1 byte Tube BytesPerPacket may be selected in increments of 1 rather than 4 TUBE SCRCLOCK FACTOR value TUBE SCRCLOCK MODE NXxxx is multiplied by SCRCLOCK FACTOR to produce the SCRCLOCK NX300 300 times factor Maximum factor is 18 Data
234. parameters TUBE BUFFERS and TUBE FPP frames per packet directly correlate with the flow of IP packets on the IP Tube Ethernet interface Selection of a large FPP value result ing in large IP packets or of a large TUBE BUFFERS setting resulting in a excessive buffering of received data will result in significant latency from end to end This latency will have a negative impact on delay sensitive data such as voice which is severely degraded when round trip delays approach 20 milliseconds The following examples provide insight into the various delay mechanisms which can occur if TUBE BUFFERS and TUBE FPP are configured improperly Refer to the IP Tube Delay chart in the Appen dices for quick calculation Example 1 AT1 frame of 193 bits takes 125 microseconds usec to transmit at 1 544 Mbps Similarly an E1 frame of 256 bits takes 125 usec to transmit at 2 048 Mbps If a user configures FPP to 8 then the IP Tube introduces a 1 millisecond msec packetization de lay as it receives 8 frames and encapsulates them into a single IP packet Note Delay each way must be doubled for the round trip 8 x 125 usec 1 msec delay If TUBE BUFFERS is then configured to 5 five packets are buffered and the resulting delay is 5 x 1msec 5 msec Roundtrip delay would be twice that or 10 msec Example 2 The recommended FPP setting for E1 is 12 which introduces a 1 5 msec packetization delay 12 x 125 usec 1 5 msec If TUBE BUFFE
235. ple Spanning is set to off so that the Spanning Tree Protocol is not used Master Unit config Host Contact Test Tube Host Location Test Lab IP Default 192 168 1 50 Spanning Off RateLimit 3 Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off Interface LAN1 AutoNegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 Port On Interface LAN2 AutoNegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 52 24 Port On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol ADPIPTube Protocol ADPIPTube DelayRetransmit 5 Protocol ADPIPTube LimitRetransmit 2 Protocol ADPIPTube CountRetransmit 1 Tube On Tube Framing T1 Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 2 TOS 08 79 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 16 Tube Compression Off Tube SequenceRecovery On T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1LBO CSU 1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7F T1 TxUnderrunAlS Off T1 Channels Full Interface S2 Type T1 Protocol ADPIPTube Protocol ADPIPTube DelayRetransmit 5 Protocol ADPIPTube LimitRetransmit 2 Protocol ADPIPTube CountRetransmit 1 Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 2 Destination 192 168 2 53 Tube 2 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 2 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 16 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 2 Ethernet Arp On Tube Seque
236. pter 7 Tube RS530DL RS530HS RS232 X 21 V35 and IP Tube SER RS530 RS232 V35 Configuration and Operation discusses the initial configuration and ongoing operation of the IP Tube models with RS 530 RS232 or V 35 synchronous serial interfaces A discussion on bandwidth and data rate issues is included Chapter 8 P Tube SER RS530 AutoProtect discusses parameters associated with the IP Tube SER RS530 Auto Protect Feature Chapter 9 T3 Configuration and Operation discusses the initial configuration and ongoing operation of the IP Tube models with synchronous serial interfaces Chapter 10 E3 Configuration and Operation discusses the initial configuration and ongoing opera tion of the IP Tube models with synchronous serial interfaces Chapter 11 Troubleshooting the most common issues occurring during installation and normal op eration Appendices IP Tube specifications connector pinouts and crossover wiring details Glossary routers networks telecommunication and TCP IP terminology Intended Audience This manual is intended for experienced system administrators The technical content is written for those who have basic computer telecommunication and networking experience It is important that any administrator responsible for the installation and operation of Engage IP Tube products be familiar with IP networking and data communication concepts such as network address ing and synchronous serial interfaces
237. r Alarm Relay Command Line Interface PASSTHRU PROTECTIVESWITCH LINKPROTECTOR ALARMRELAY Off LANFail TELFail LANorTELFail Dependant upon the AlarmRelay setting the IP Tube will connect the contacts 1 and 2 of the relay an alarm Please see the Table 13 Alarm Relay Contact in the Appendix for more information e OFF The AlarmRelay is disabled e LANFail The Alarm Relay closes if the unit detects it cannot reach the remote unit over the LAN This alarm may go off even when the Link Protector status is Up and would be a problem if the unit needed to fail over to TDM over IP The alarm ceases when IP connectivity to the remote unit is restored e TELFail The Alarm Relay closes if the unit detects a link down on the thru TEL interface It indicates the Link Protector status is in a Local Failed Over or Re mote Failed Over state and the unit is passing data via TDM over IP e LANorTELFail The Alarm Relay closes if either the LANFail or TELFail alarm is active The state of the Alarm Relay can be determined by displaying the output of the Show Info command within the global interface Alarm Relay can be Off Alarm Inactive or On Alarm Active Alarm Relay Off Reasons e Configured Off NoAlarm Alamr Relay On Reasons e TEL1 LAN Remote Unreachable Local unit cannot reach the LAN port of the 25 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide Tube Destination in S
238. r of channels to be used For example 384 Kbps fractional E1 typically uses channels 1 through 6 The start channel is 1 and the total channels is 6 where NN defines the start channel and XX is the total number of channels E1 FRAC 16 Alternatively for channels in use that are not contiguous NN and MM are single E1 channels in use and Y Z are a range of E1 channels in use Single channels and ranges are separated by commas and can be combined on a command line For example an ISDN PRI link uses channels 31 for D Channel signaling and 5 20 for voice circuits E1 FRAC 5 20 31 E1 Equalization ON OFF Enables or disables the Equalizer feature which provides automatic recieve line sensitivity adjust ment E1 Equalizer should be on when the E1 signal levlel is below 10dB In general it is fine to have the Equalizer ON for all installations E1 MODE Term Monitor Sets the interface mode of E1 interface Term is used when the E1 interface is the only one connect ing to the E1 device Note Monitor mode must only be selected for E1 line receiving only on circuits with substantial signal attenuation such as encountered when connecting into a E1 Monitor jack with isolation resistors Monitor mode is used primarily for signal analysis 154 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide E1 Echo Canceller E1 ECHOCANCELLER ON OFF Enables or disables echo cancellation ECAN is not field upgr
239. raps Note OFF disables processing and responses to standard SNMP queries excluding traps SNMP COMMUNITYNAME ReadWrite Set or modify IPe Tube SNMP community name This string is used for authentication of SNMP SetRe quests and SNMP traps The default community name is public Note Do not enter a pass phrase to create the host key or password Example SNMP Community Name Read Get Only IP Tube DLT1 snmp communityname Enter new password password string not echoed gt Confirm new password password string not echoed gt IP Tube DLT1 Example SNMP Community Name Read Write Set Get IP Tube DLT1 snmp communityname readwrite Enter new password lt password string not echoed gt Confirm new password lt password string not echoed gt IP Tube DLT1 SNMP TRAPS ON OFF Turns ON or OFF generation of SNMPv1 Traps The Destination Address for these traps must be configured to be an SNMP management station capable of decoding SNMPv1 traps SNMP TRAPS ADDRESS address Sets the Destination IP Address to which the IP Tube will send SNMPv1 Traps SHOW Commands SHOW INTERFACE LAN1 LAN2 S1 S2 INFO STATISTICS For the IP Tube GT1 GE1 use the command SHOW INTERFACE LAN1 LAN2 S1 S2 S3 4 INFO STATISTICS Provides details on any LAN or serial interface If no interface is specified either the current interface per the Interface command will be used or all interfaces will be shown INFO Detai
240. rate from 300 to 5 4K NX2K4 2 4k times factor Maximum factor is 18 Data rate from 2 4K to 43 2K NX56K 56k times factor Maximum factor is 32 Data rate from 56K to 1792K NX64K 64k times factor Maximum factor is 32 Data rate from 64K to 2048K NX100K 100k times factor Valid factors are 1 2 4 and 8 Data rate from 100K to 800K NX3P2M 3 2M times factor Valid factors are 1 2 4 and 8 Data rate from 3 2M to 25 6M TUBE SCTCLOCK MODE NX300 NX2K4 NX56K NX64K NX100K NX3P2M The TUBE SCTCLOCK MODE setting in combination with the SCTCLOCK FACTOR controls the frequency of the Serial DCE interface s Serial Clock Transmit 159 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide TUBE SCTCLOCK FACTOR value TUBE SCTCLOCK MODE NXxxx is multiplied by SCTCLOCK FACTOR to produce the SCTCLOCK NX300 300 times factor Maximum factor is 18 Data rate from 300 to 5 4K NX2K4 2 4k times factor Maximum factor is 18 Data rate from 2 4K to 43 2K NX56K 56k times factor Maximum factor is 32 Data rate from 56K to 1792K NX64K 64k times factor Maximum factor is 32 Data rate from 64K to 2048K NX100K 100k times factor Valid factors are 1 2 4 and 8 Data rate from 100K to 800K NX3P2M 3 2M times factor Valid factors are 1 2 4 and 8 Data rate from 3 2M to 25 6M TUBE BYTESPERPACKET value Bytes Per Packet specifies the number of bytes received on the Serial Interface to be encapsu
241. ration of the network parameters and whether the number of DSOs matches Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Local IP Tube Port 1 LED Green But T1 E1 Circuit Extension not working IP Tube T1 E1OverlP Interface Loopback A method to locally loopback the T1 E1 over IP interface back to itself in order to test the configura tion of the T1 E1 Equipment and Interface S1 and the cabling Port 1 Green Indicator does not verify Transmit signal connection from the IP Tube to the T1 E1 Equipment Line is to set the Tube s destination IP Address to be the same as the IP Address of the Ethernet Interface During this test to insure that interference is not occurring from an IP Tube that is pointed to the IP Tube placed in loopback make sure that all known IP Tubes that could be streaming T1 E1OverlP packets to it are turned off The T1 E1 equipment should then detect that it is receiving what it is sending A T1 E1 test set could be used to stream a test pattern into Interface S1 for testing Basic T1 E1 Test sets do not have fractional T1 E1 configuration and the IP Tube may need to be set to Full T1 E1 on its interface S1 to thoroughly test the connection A typical problem with T1 E1 circuit extension is the misconfiguration of the Fractional T1 E1 DSOs If the T1 E1 over IP Interface Local Loopback works marginally data bit errors are occurring the T1 E1 clock settings of the T1 E1 Equipment and the IP Tube
242. removed and the motherboard slid out to access the switch 214 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide 10 100BaseT Port Specification with Crossover cable pinout 10BaseT Plug pin numbering Pind TxD Pin2 TxD Pin3 RxD Pin6 RxD For 10BaseT Crossover allowing connection directly between two 10BaseT devices wire TD Pini to Pin3 RD TD Pin2 to Pin6 RD RD Pin3 to Pini TD RD Pin6 to Pin2 TD Table 5 10 100BaseT Port Specification 215 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide T1 and E1 Port Specification with Crossover Pinouts Tl fracT1 DSU CSU Pin numbering RxRing RxTip TxRing TxTip For 1 Crossover allowing connection directly between two T1 fracT1 DSU CSU devices wire TxTip Pin5 to Pin2 RxTip TxRing Pin4 to 1 RxRing RxRing Pin1 to 4 TxRing RxTip Pin2 to Pin5 TxTip Table 6 DSU CSU Port Specification 216 Appendices Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide E1 RJ45 to db15 Cable Signal RJ45 db15 Male TxD Tip 5 1 RxD Tip 2 3 TxD Ring 4 9 RxD Ring 1 11 Table 7 DSU CSU RJ45 to DB15 Modular Adapter Pinout Console Port Information RJ45 Console Port Pinout RJ45 pin Signal Name 3 TxData 6 RxData 1 RTS 8 CTS 4 Gnd 2 DTR RJ45 db9F Null Modem Adapter RJ45 pin db9pin 3 2 6 3 1 8 4 5 2 6 Table 8 Console Port Pinout 217 Appendices Engage Com
243. rface or as a Data Terminal Equipment DTE interface As a DCE it provides TxClk and RxClk to the connected DTE The DCE model must have a configured data rate through the IP Tube RS530 by setting timing pa rameters which control the TxClk and RxCIk The size and frequency of the IP packets can be con trolled yielding data rates ranging from 2 4 to 250Kbits sec Chapter 7 Tube RS530DL RS530HS RS232 X 21 V35 and IP Tube SER RS530 RS232 V35 provides an explanation of the commands and their effect V 35 Interface The IP Tube V35 model provides a V 35 synchronous serial interface for connection to Data Terminal Equipment DTE or Data Communication Equipment DCE such as Encrypters Terminal Servers Video Codecs and WAN Routers The IP Tube V35 encapsulates the serial data into IP packets for transmission over Ethernet The V 35 interface is provided via a 25 pin D connector on the rear panel though this pinout differs from that of the IP Tube RS530 See the Appendices for pinouts signal names and directions The V 35 interface on the IP Tube is built as a Data Communication Equipment DCE interface or as a Data Terminal Equipment DTE interface As a DCE it provides TxCIk and RxCIk to the connected DTE The DCE model must have a configured data rate through the IP Tube V 35 by setting timing pa rameters which control the TxClk and RxCIk The size and frequency of the IP packets can be con trolled yielding data rate
244. rimary connects When the unit is configured AutoProtect Secondary it checks the Primary state via the signaling cable If the Primary is powered off or does not have a good connection state with its peer it gives an Inactive signal to the Secondary which causes the Secondary to connect with the Serial Data and Clocking Y cable When the Secondary receives an Active signal from the Primary the Secondary disconnects from the Serial Data and Clocking Y cable NOTE The Y cables referenced in this section are cables that are delivering the Serial Data and Clocking to BOTH IP Tube SER Primary and Secondary units 185 Engage Communication User s Guide TUBE CONFIRMREMOTEALIVE ON OFF DONOTTALK Tube ConfirmRemoteAlive must be ON for proper monitoring of the connection state and switching of the Primary link It still performs its normal functionality but allows the added AutoProtect capability to function The LAN connections are tested every 10ms with a keep alive heartbeat between the local and remote units NOTE If AutoProtect switches operation to the Secondary units due to loss of LAN connectivity on both LAN ports Tube ConfirmRemoteAlive will validate that both Serial interfaces S1 and S2 are transmitting out both serial interfaces before allowing the Primary units to resume operation TUBE CONFIRMREMOTEALIVE TIMEOUT value Tube ConfirmRemoteAlive Timeout is a user configurable parameter to determine
245. ring Tube Buffers for ADP 17 Table of Contents Engage Communication User s Guide Retransmission 17 Assured Delivery Command Line Interface 18 Protector Option 18 Protector Operation 19 Enhanced Mode Protector Option 19 Considerations for Network Conditions 19 Protector Configuration 20 Protector Command Line Interface 20 Switch Option 22 Switch PassThru Clock 22 Local IP Tube Master Clocking 23 Configuration Considerations 23 Switch Command Line Interface 23 Link Protector 24 PassThru ProtectiveSwitch 24 Link Protector Automatic Switch Criteria 24 Link Protector Command Line Interface 25 Link Protector Alarm Relay Command Line Interface 25 SNMP Support 26 Chapter 4 28 Configuration Examples 28 Example ZA DLT1 Generic 28 Example ZB DLE1 Generic 33 Example C DLT1 Generic providing 10mS Delay 37 Example 1 DLT1 Dual 10 100BaseT Two Active T1 Ports 57 Example 2 DLE1 Dual 10 100BaseT Fractional E1 60 Example 3 DLT1 C Dual LAN Ports with Compression 63 Example 4 DLT1 Dual LAN Ports with Echo Cancellation 67 Example 5 DLT1 C Dual LAN Ports Two Active T1 Ports Internal Clocking with Compression and Assured Delivery Protocol 70 Example 6 1 Dual LAN Ports Four Active Serial Ports 73 Example 7 1 Dual LAN Ports Four Active Serial Ports with Rate Limiter Assured Delivery Protocol Internal Clocking 78 Example 8 GE1 Dual LAN Ports Four Active E1 Ports with Rate Limiter Inte
246. rived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com
247. rnal Clocking 84 Example 9 1 Dual 10 100BaseT Fractional E 1s Network Clocking 89 Example 10 DLT1 Dual LAN Ports Two Active Serial Ports with Compression and Echo Cancellation and Assured Delivery Protocol 94 Example 11 IP Tube RS530 Video 97 Example 12 P Tube V 35 HDLC 98 Example 13 IP Tube SER RS530 99 Example 14 P Tube SER RS2323 104 Example 15 P Tube SER V 35 110 Legacy Configurations Examples 116 Example 1 IP Tube DLT1 Full 24 DSOs with T1 Framing Bits 116 Example 2 IP TubeDLT1 Fractional T1 8 DSOs without T1 Framing Bits 117 Example 3 P Tube T1 Compression 24 0505 with 56 to 1 Compression 118 Example 4 1 Full 31 DSOs with E1 Framing Byte 119 Example 5 IP Tube Fractional E1 8 DSOs without E1 Framing Byte 120 Table of Contents Engage Communication User s Guide Example 6 IP Tube E1 Compression 32 0505 with 40 to 1 Compression 120 Example 7 IP Tube RS530 Video 121 Chapter 5 123 Command Line Interface 123 Console Communication 123 Logging in to the IP Tube 123 Overview of Commands 123 Categories 124 Online Help 124 Configuration Modes 124 Syntax for Command Parameters 124 Show Config All 125 System Level or General Commands 125 Upgrade Firmware 126 SNMP Configuration 127 SHOW Commands 127 LAN Interface Statistics 128 Serial Interface Statistics 129 SSHD Information 130 Config Interface Commands 131 Local Area Network Interfaces 132
248. rops the Protector fails over from LAN1 to LAN2 If in a Qualification time the number of DrainDrops is does not exceed TxDrainDrops the Protector switches back from LAN2 to LAN1 The range of values is from 5 to 200 TUBE PROTECTOR TXUNDERRUNS NN TXUnderruns is failover criteria representing the number of serial interface transmit underruns A serial underrun occurs when the Tube buffer is depleted This can happen because the flow of incom ing IP Tube packets from the LAN is stopped or the rate of incoming packets is less than the rate the IP Tube is transmitting on the serial port The range of values is from 5 to 200 If in a PollingPeriod the number of serial interface transmit underruns exceeds TXUnderruns the Protector fails over from LAN1 to LAN2 If in a Qualification time the number serial interface transmit underruns does not exceed TxUnder runs the Protector switches back from LAN2 to LAN1 Serial interface transmit underruns are displayed as Transmit UN errors by issuing the Show Statis tics command 21 Chapter 3 Installation Engage Communication User s Guide Switch Option The Switch Option enables the S1 interface to be manually switched between a T1 E1 circuit con nected to the S2 interface or to T1 E1 over IP packets connected with a remote IP Tube This gives remote control of a T1 E1 connection to the Telco or T1 E1 over IP Installation can be performed by a single technician an
249. rotector operates in the manner of the T1 E1 Switch Option Switching between the S2 port and T1 over IP is acheived with PassThru On or Off When Passthru Protective is LinkProtector the LinkProtector option is enabled Switching between the S2 port and T1 E1 over IP is automatic PASSTHRU PROTECTIVE LINKPROTECTOR YELLOWALARM BLUFALARM When YELLOWALARM is selected a YellowAlarm indication on the TEL2 port causes a switch to T1 E1 over IP in addition to a Loss of Signal Loss of Frame or AIS Blue Alarm condition When BLUEALARM is selected only Loss of Signal Loss of Frame or AIS Blue Alarm causes a Switch PASSTHRU PROTECTIVESWITCH LINKPROTECTOR FAILOVERPERIOD NNN Time in seconds that LinkProtector evaluates the integrity of the link Valid range is 1 to 255 seconds PASSTHRU PROTECTIVESWITCH LINKPROTECTOR FAILOVERTHRESHOLD NNN Percentage of errored seconds If exceeded within the FailoverPeriod this will cause the path to failover to the LAN interface IPTube protocol Valid range is 1 to 100 percent PASSTHRU PROTECTIVESWITCH LINKPROTECTOR FAILBACKPERIOD NNN Time in seconds LinkProtector evaluates the integrity of the link Valid range is 1 to 255 seconds PASSTHRU PROTECTIVESWITCH LINKPROTECTOR FAILBACKTHRESHOLD NNN Percentage of errored seconds If NOT exceeded within the FailBackPeriod this will cause the path to failback to the S2 interface PassThru protocol Valid range is 1 to 100 percent Link Protecto
250. rotector switches back from LAN2 to LAN1 Received packets out of sequence for a serial interface can be displayed by issuing the Show Statis tics command TUBE PROTECTOR RXPACKETPERCENT NN RxPacketPercent is failover criteria representing the percent of IP Tube packets received to the number of IP Tube packets expected Missing packets would cause the percentage to fall RXPacketPercent is specifed in terms of percent and the range of values is from 50 to 100 percent If in a PollingPeriod the percentage of received packets to expected packets is less than RxPacket Percent the Protector fails over from LAN1 to LAN2 If in a Qualification time the percentage of received packets to expected packets is not less than RXPacketPercent the Protector switches back from LAN2 to LAN1 TUBE PROTECTOR TXDRAINDROPS NN TxDrainDrops is failover criteria representing received IP Tube packets dropped because the Tube serial transmit buffer has grown too large It can be thought of as a Tube buffer overflow DrainDrops can be observed as Transmit DrainDrops by issuing the Show Statistics command DrainDrops can occur because the remote IP Tube is sending IP Tube packets on the LAN at a rate faster than the local 1 is transmitting on the serial port or the IP network has delayed bunched then released IP Tube packets or the serial transmitter has stopped transmitting If in a PollingPeriod the number of DrainDrops detected exceeds TXDrainD
251. rt can be utlized to communicate with the IP Tube locally through a terminal or remotely by dialing in through a modem Telnet part of the TCP IP Protocol Suite provides a general communications facility defining a stan dard method of interfacing terminal devices to each other Any standard Telnet application can be used to communicate to an Engage IP Tube provided there is IP connectivity between the User Host and the IPTube Console Communication Serial communication to the console port should be configured for 9600 baud 1 stop bit no parity 8 bit data flow control none The console port is an RJ45 jack and an appropriate cable and adapter are provided with the IP Tube for use with standard 9 pin COM ports The RJ45 console port is configured as a DCE data commu nication equipment port Upon connecting enter a cr and a LOGIN prompt will appear The default Login ID is root No password is needed until the user sets it with the PASSWD command Logging in to the IP Tube A Telnet session is opened by providing the IP address of the IP Tube On opening a Command Line Interface CLI session via Telnet or the Console port the Login prompt requires entry of a login ID The default login ID root The IP Tube is shipped with no password set Passwords are set or modified with the passwd com mand detailed below Overview of Commands The Engage CLI supports shorthand character entry At most 3 characters are req
252. runs NN Defines the number of Transmit Underruns encountered during the polling period to cause a switch Enhanced Protector Commands TUBE PROTECTOR ENHANCED MODE ON OFF Enhanced Mode optional is designed to accommodate the packet arrival delay that can occur be tween LAN1 and LAN2 packet networks Buffering is added to the faster path so that packet loss on one link is replaced with a packet from the other link without a fault Enhanced mode is specifically designed to work with the difference between Satellite and Terrestial network delays Interoperability requires recieving IPTube also be configured for Enhanced Mode since Enhanced Mode uses 16 bit sequence numbers The Secondary Queue from LAN2 provides redundancy for LAN1 packet loss or outage Buffers are synchronized with LAN1 buffer to hold up to 500 millisec onds of delay from LAN1 TUBE PROTECTOR ENHANCED RECEIVER TRANSMITTER The Enhanced Protector allows a unit to be configured as a receiver or a transmitter to accommodate simplex connections This command selects whether or not the LAN interfaces transmit IP Tube packets However if a unit is configured as a transmitter it is still capable of receiving a data stream TUBE PROTECTOR ENHANCED PRIMARY LAN1 LAN2 The Enhanced Protector allows a user to designate either LAN1 or LAN2 as its Primary port The oth er LAN port becomes the Secondary port The Secondary port is responsible for sending or receiving the
253. ry units Normal operation will happen over the Primary IP Tubes at the local and remote locations while the Secondary IP Tubes wait in Standby mode until the Primary units become inactive The Secondary units will automatically senses when the communication between a pair of Primary IP Tubes is lost This is done by using a signaling connection between the Primary and Secondary unit at both locations Once the Primary units are ready to resume operation the Secondary units will go back into standby mode System and Ethernet Parameters The IP Tube s System parameters and LAN interface configuration items are described in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface for specific syntax requirements and Chapter 7 Tube RS 530DL RS530HS RS232 X 21 V35 and Tube SER RS530 RS232 V35 Configuration amp Operation This portion of the manual is dedicated to the installation parameters as sociated with the SER RS530 AutoProtect configuration AutoProtect Feature Settings AUTOPROTECT OFF PRIMARY SECONDARY This is a Global Interface setting When AutoProtect is Off the AutoProtect feature is not enabled When the unit is configured AutoProtect Primary it is responsible for determining the state of the con nection between itself and its peer When the connection state is good the Primary signals the Sec ondary via the signaling cable The Secondary then disconnects from the Serial Data and Clocking Y cable and the P
254. s SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 108 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube 1 TOS 0x08 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S2 Type RS 232 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode NX64k Tube SCTClock Factor 1 Tube RemoteClockConfig Off Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 DynamicAddress Off Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 0x08 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Tube Overflow 3 Tube Buffers 5 Tube BytesPerPacket 160 Tube Duplicates 0 Interface S3 Type RS 232 Mode Synchronous SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol IPTube Tube Name Tube On Tube Clock PLL Tube TermTiming Off Tube SCRClock Mode NX64k Tube SCRClock Factor 1 Tube SCTClock Mode
255. s T1 E1 interface must be set up to a master slave relationship For example the T1 E1 Equipment should be set to Network Timing and the IP Tube s T1 E1 clock should be set to Internal timing IP Tube IP Interconnect Verification The most straight forward way to test the T1 E1 Circuit extension of the IP Tubes is to have them connected into the same Ethernet Hub with unique IP addresses that are within the same subnet For example set one of the IP Tubes to 192 168 1 1 and the other to 192 168 1 2 Note Once an IP Tube has determined the Mac Ethernet Address of the remote unit it requires a reset to obtain the Mac Ethernet Address of a substitute unit IP Tube Off Net IP Interconnect Verification In most applications the IP Tubes will be located on different IP networks and the interconnection is through a routed connection At each end of the routed connection the IP Tube s default router IP address needs to be pointed to the first router in the path to that remote IP subnet Through a Telnet connection to an IP Tube it is possible to verify the ability of the IP Tube to ping its local default router and to ping the remote IP Tube Note The console port does not support the Ping Command as it does not have an IP Address Show Statistics 203 The CLI command SHOW STATISTICS provides way to check whether the T1OverlP port is receiv ing T1 frames on its Port interface and transmitting them out its Ethernet interface Also reception of
256. s allow the user to configure these clocks to Normal mode or to Inverted mode The DTE to which the IP Tube connects may require inverted clock NOTE If the IP Tube is configured as a DTE the SCR may need to be inverted for proper opera tion INTERFACE LAN1 LAN2 S1 S2 S3 S4 Configuration of the SER RS530 RS232 and V35 models include configuring the device port and the ethernet port Specify the port to be configred with the command TUBE SCRCLOCK MODE NX300 NX2K4 NX56K NX64K NX100K NX3P2M The TUBE SCRCLOCKMODE setting in combination with the SCRCLOCK FACTOR controls the frequency of the Serial DCE interface s Serial Clock Receive To reduce latency when NX300 is selected the internal transmit FIFO is reduced from 32 bytes to 1 byte and the receive FIFO is reduced from 4 to 1 byte Tube BytesPerPacket may be selected in increments of 1 rather than 4 TUBE SCRCLOCKFACTOR value TUBE SCRCLOCK MODE NXxxx is multiplied by SCRCLOCK FACTOR to produce the SCR CLOCK 300 clock rate from 300 to 5 4K as multiples of 300 e NX2KA clock rate from 2 4K to 43 2K as multiples of 2 4K NX56K clock rate from 56K to 1792K as multiples of 56k NX64K clock rate from 64K to 2048K as multiples of 64K NX100K clock rate from 100K to 800K valid factors 1 2 4 and 8 e NX3P2M clock rate from 3 2M to 25 6M valid factors 1 2 4 and 8 TUBE SCTCLOCK MODE NX300 NX2K4 NX56K NX64K NX100K NX
257. s also passed on to the remote unit set for PLL When set to PLL the tube tunes its transmit clock to match the rate of the local tube Passing it on to the equipment it is connected to Example interface s1 t3 clocking internal save y Latency and Bandwidth Considerations The IP Tube has an adjustable setting to accommodate for Network jitter TUBE BUFFERS will set the amount of jitter tolerance the IP Tube will be able to handle on the Network The values are entered in milliseconds A TUBE BUFFERS value of 5 represents 5 ms of buffering a value of 8 would be 8 ms of buffering The minimum and maximum values are 3 to 11 This setting should match on both units The round trip delay can be calculated by multiplying the TUBE BUFFERS value by 2 The IP Tube has a fixed parameter for TUBE FPP frames per packet not displayed in the configura tion The 8 000 bits of T3 are loaded into IP packet that is IP addressed and sent to the other IPTube T3 where these bits are buffered Example interface s1 tube buffers 8 save y IP Packet Encapsulation Overhead The encapsulation of T3 data into IP UDP packets for transmission over Ethernet adds overhead due to the Ethernet IP and UDP headers a total of 44 bytes This 44 byte overhead is a very small per rcentage of the 1000 byte packet payload that it does not need to be taken into account when consid ering Ethernet bandwidth utilization The IPTubeT3 utilizes 5 more th
258. s ranging from 8 Kbits sec to 1 544 Mbits sec Chapter 7 IP Tube RS530DL RS530HS RS232 X 21 V35 and IP Tube SER RS530 RS232 V35 provides an explanation of the commands and their effect Status LEDs Front panel LEDs provide Power Ethernet and Serial Interface status Power The Power LED is normally green although at power on it may briefly blink if a firmware upgrade TFTP upgrade stored in the FLASH ROM is being loaded Ethernet The IP Tube T1 provides specific information with EthRX and EthTX indicators providing status on packet transmission and receipt respectively on the Ethernet interface When receiving the RxD will show a steady GREEN When transmitting the TxD will show a steady GREEN Serial Interfaces The IP Tube provides specific information with TD and RD indicators providing status on valid fram ing from the T1 E1device or line to which the IP Tube is connected In addition ST and LNK indica tors provide link status communication processor and framing respectively from the T1 E1device or line to which the IP Tube is connected There are four indicators S1 through S4 indicators providing status on valid framing from the T1 de vice or line Please note that the S1 through S4 indicators will only show connections for the amount of ports purchased When transmitting the TD will show a steady GREEN When receiving the RD will show a steady GREEN If the IP Tube is unable to 15 Chapter 3 I
259. single 10 100BaseT or 5 10 100BaseT inter faces four are connected as a switch The LAN and Serial interface configuration parameters e e e Autonegotiate On Interface determines speed and duplex mode Autonegotiate Off Speed and duplex are set manually Speed 10Mbps or 100Mbps Duplex half or full BroadcastRCV On automatically resolves MAC Addresses BroadcastRCV Off Ethernet address can be configured with a MAC address ARP On uses the automatically obtained MAC address ARP Off enables manual MAC address assignment Protocol settings IPTube CESoIP HDLCOoIP controls packetization format of the IP Tube Framing T1 E1 Framed uses T1 E1 framing bits along with DSO data and Transparent encapsulates DSO data with out framing information TOS setting ensures data is given a high priority QoS setting securely uses configurable UDP port number Compression On on C models enables compression E Can On provides Echo Cancellation function on some models ECAN is not field upgradable must be ordered at time of purchase Clocking has four different options to clock Internally from the Network or from another IP Tube unit V2PLL or PLL 165 Engage Communication User s Guide IP Tube Installation Steps The process of installing an DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 involves the following steps e Planning for the IP Tube interconnect e Installing the IP Tube hardw
260. smit is the ouput and Receive is the input UNIT 1 IP Default router Tube Capability On Telnet On UserTimeout Off SNMP Off SNMP Traps Off Interface LAN1 Auto Negotiation On IP Address 192 168 3 50 24 IP Default router Port On BroadcastRcv On IP State RUNNING Interface E3 Type E3 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 3 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Hex Tube Duplicates 0 Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Tube SequenceRecovery Off 200 Chapter 10 IP Tube Configuration and Operation Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Communication and Network systems are subject to issues from a variety of sources Fortunately an organized troubleshooting approach usually leads to the area of the problem in short order It is essential to distinguish between problems caused by the LAN network system the WAN commu nication equipment the T1 E1 Equipment and the IP Tube configuration This troubleshooting chapter is structured with symptoms in the order the user might encounter them Unable to Communicate with the IP Tube Installations first require communication with the IP Tube usually from the same network as the IP Tube itself Proceed through the following symptoms if you are unable to communicate with the local IP Tube using Telnet Ping etc IP Addressing should be double checked E
261. t The T1 fracT1 interface can be configured to operate at rates from 64Kbps to full T1 at 1 544 Mbps The IP Tube can be configured to transport T1 Framing bits All configurations items including Line Coding Framing and TxData timing are configurable using the Command Line Interface CLI E1 fractionalE1 Interface The internal E1 fractional E1 DSU CSU permits direct connection to the E1 interface of E1 based telecommunication equipment such as a PBX or an E1 Multiplexer This connection uses a panel RJ48 jack and accepts 8 pin modular plugs E1 fracE1 circuits use pins 1 amp 2 for RxData and 4 amp 5 for TxData An RJ48 DB15 adapter cable is available if the E1 line is terminated in a 15 pin male D con nector See Appendices for E1 pinout and cable specification Note The E1 interface is 120 ohm balanced The E1 RJ45 interface is converted to the E1 120 bal anced DB15 Male interface via an RJ45 to DB15 male adapter The E1 fracE1 interface can be set to run at rates from 64Kbps to full E1 speed of 2 048 Mbps All configuration items including Line Coding and Clock Source are configurable using the Com mand Line Interface RS530 Interface The IP Tube RS530 model provides a standard RS530 synchronous serial interface for connection to Data Terminal Equipment DTE or Data Communication Equipment DCE such as Encrypters Terminal Servers Video Codecs WAN Routers The IP Tube RS530 encapsulates the serial data into I
262. t Broadcast Multicast Reception Control 120 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide BroadcastRCV ON Interface S1 Type E1 Tube Parameters Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Framing Transparent IP Address of remote IP Tube Tube Address 192 168 2 1 Tube TOS 0x08 Tube Buffers 10 Note Echo Cancellation Required Tube FPP 40 Tube Compression ON Tube Destination Ethernet Address Resolution Tube Ethernet ARP ON Tube Ethernet Address E1 Parameters E1 Data Normal E1 Transmit timing set to Internal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter 0x7F E1 Channels Full Example 7 RS530 Video IP Tube RS530 V 35 configurations are detailed in this section The command line configuration listing are shown for each example The configuration commands are defined in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface as well as in a detailed discussion provided in Chapter 7 TubeRS530 V35 Configuration amp Operation Scenario This sample configuration details the interconnection of a synchronous serial Video Encoder to a Video Decoder via IP gt TubeRS530s that are providing smooth clocking at a rate of 1 536 Megabits per second The IP Tube s Ethernet interconnection has a committed information rate that is much greater than the IP Tube s maximum data rate Therefore the Ethernet bandwidth available is relatively unlimited The Tube Clo
263. t MAC addresses manually it is recommended that BroadcastRCV is set to ON unless broadcast storms are expected on the network where the IP Tubes reside For the Ethernet interface first specify INT Interface LAN1 Typically if BroadcastRCV is set to Off the IP Tube Ethernet ARP and Tube Ethernet Address need to be configured with the MAC address of the IP Tube packet s Ethernet destination Since the desti nation for the IP Tube packet will have its broadcast receive turned Off also IP ADDRESS address mask The interface IP address and subnet mask are required for connection to the network configuration with telnet or connectivity tests with ping The subnet mask can be entered in long or short form Examples IP ADDRESS 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 IP ADDRESS 192 168 1 1 24 IP DEFAULT ROUTER address Configures the IP address of the default router or gateway for this Ethernet interface This must be an IP address on the same network as the IP Tube Ethernet interface This default router takes prece dence over the system s default router Note If DHCP is ON for this LAN interface the Default Rout er Gateway is discovered 8021Q OFF ON Enables or disables IEEE 802 1Q tagging of transmitted LAN packets ON enables 802 1q tagging for all outbound LAN packets for that interface 132 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide OFF disables 802 1q tagging and processing for the specified LA
264. t bandwidth Command Line Listing Host Name IP Tube E1 IP Default router IP Cost 1 Interface E1 IP Address of this IP Tube IP Address 192 168 1 1 24 Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Reception Control BroadcastRCV ON Interface S1 Type E1 Tube Parameters Protocol IP Tube Tube On Tube Framing E1Framed IP Address of Remote IP Tube Tube Address 192 168 1 2 Tube UDPPort 3175 Tube TOS 08 Hex Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Compression Off Tube Destination Ethernet Address Resolution Tube Ethernet ARP On Tube Ethernet Address E1 Interface Configuration Parameters E1 Data Normal E1 Transmit timing set to Phase Lock Loop E1 Clocking V2PLL E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter 0x7F E1 Channels Full 119 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication User s Guide Example 5 IP Tube Fractional E1 8 DSOs without E1 Framing Byte Scenario This sample configuration details an IP Tube interconnect of a fractional E1 without framing byte E1 framing is generated locally DSO 1 through 8 are transported This IP Tube is set to internal timing as the master clock of the IP Tube s E1 connection The remote IP Tube must be set to use its Phase Lock Loop to match this frequency Note the remote IP Tube is across a WAN whose IP address range is 192 168 2 x The WAN router address is 192 168 1 4 and is the address for the Default Router Command Line Listing
265. t locally Cause Workstation not on the same subnet as the IP Tube Solution During an initial configuration of an IP Tube communication should come from within the same network or subnet With no default router the IP Tube will not be able to reply to communica tion off its own subnet Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Cause IP stack on the workstation not configured Solution Ensure that other devices on the same LAN can be pinged or otherwise seen Can t communicate to the IP Tube Console Port Cause Baud Rate Stop Bits etc set wrong on communication application Solution Ensure the communication software is configured for a fixed asynchronous data rate of 9600 bps 1 stop bit no parity 8 bit fixed and that the Flow control is set to none Cause Transmit and Receive Data swapped Solution The console port is configured as a DCE data communication equipment port For con nection to other DCE devices such as a modem a Null Modem adapter is required Note the RJ45 Cable that connects to the Console Port must have 8 connections pinned 1 to 1 Typical Ethernet cables are only 4 wires RJ45 to DB9 adapter The RJ45 to DB9 adapter included performs the Null Modem function T1 E1 Circuit Extension to Remote IP Tube not Functioning Local IP Tube Port 1 LED Remains Blank All equipment has been configured and connected and the T1 E1 equipment has been turned up yet the port 1 LED remains blank r
266. tact TestUnit Host Location TestLab IP Default 000 000 000 000 Telnet On User Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 IP Default 192 168 2 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Default 192 168 2 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 40 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Capability Off Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Interface S2 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Network E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter OxT7f START CHANNEL NUMBER OF CHANNELS E1 Channels Fractional 1 8 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off 61 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube LANPort LAN2 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 52 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 40 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Network E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter 0x7f START CHANNEL
267. te Tube Framing T1 sends an All Ones out the T1 interface in the event of an underrun regardless of this setting T1 CLOCKING NETWORK INTERNAL V2PLL PLL GPS JOCXO GPSBackupOCXO Determines the source of Transmit Clock TxCk When set to Network the DSU CSU derives its transmit timing from the received data RxD and is therefore synchronized with the telco the phone network This is generally used when connecting through commercial carriers When set to Internal the DSU CSU transmits data at a rate set by an internal clock This mode is referred to as Master timing and is used when testing on the bench one unit set to Master the other to Slave When set to GPS the DSU CSU transmits data at a rate set by a GPS Antenna This mode is also referred to as Master timing If using this setting the other unit should be set to Slave When set to V2PLL or PLL the tube tunes its transmit clock to match the rate of the remote tube 147 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide When the remote tube clocking is Internal Network or GPS this tube should be set to V2PLL Note T1 Clocking GPS OCXO and GPSBackupOCXO is only available for the IP Tube G4 as an upgradable options T1 Equalization ON OFF Enables or disables the Equalizer feature which provides automatic receive line sensitivity adjust ment T1 Equalizer should be on when the T1 signal levlel is below 10dB In
268. te Files See Chapter 4 Configuration Examples e Console Port for Out of Band Management SNMP support MIB I MIB II e Remote configuration amp monitoring IP Tube Dip Switch Settings All Models IP Tube systems contain a four position DIP Switch which is accessible by removing the unit rear panel and sliding out the motherboard The default setting for all DIP switches is OFF Switch 1 Power cycling the unit with DIP Switch 1 ON forces the IP Tube to return to Base Flash operation and deleting any download upgrades Ensure Switch 1 is returned to the OFF position after clearing an upgrade so future upgrades can be performed successfully Switch 2 Applies only to IP Tube C units with lossless DSO compression Setting to ON will disable the com pression Note This must be done at each IP Tube and a RESTART or power cycle executed Switch 3 Switch 3 is used during manufacturing to test the VCXO The switch must be set to OFF for normal operation Switch 4 When turned ON it forces the IP Tube T1 E1 RS530 or V 35 interface into loopback mode This is useful for troubleshooting the Telco Serial connection The IP Tube UNO and G4 has a single pushbutton switch When holding this switch durring the boot cycle it will do the following Force operation from Base Flash and delete an downloaded upgrades On the UNO the switch is accessable through the rear panel via a paperclip On the G4 the rear panel must be
269. ted 42797045 Receive Overrun 0 Receive Framing 0 Receive Misc 0 Transmit CSL Transmit UN Transmit RL Transmit LC Transmit Misc Errors TOTAL Transmit Buffer Queue Depth LAN Statistic Data Packets Received Description The number of LAN packets received Received and Transmitted packets should be about the same If they are not the same the packets are not getting to the IP Tube Check network configurations stability and bandwidth Receive CRC The packet had a CRC error Receive Overrun Overrun of internal FIFO used in transfer of LAN data to memory or a frame was received and discarded due to lack of buffers or a large frame was received Receive Framing A nonoctect aligned frame was received Receive Misc A short frame was received or a general error indicating an unexpected result in a buffer descriptor or a buffer that was not a complete frame was received on the Ethernet channel Packets Transmitted The number of LAN packets transmitted Transmit CSL Carrier Sense Lost during frame transmission Transmit UN Transmit Underrun The Ethernet controller encountered a transmitter underrun while sending a buffer Transmit RL Transmit Retransmission Limit The transmitter failed attempts to suc cessfully send a message due to repeated collisions statistic not set on IP Tube Transmit LC Late Collision A collision occurred after 64 bytes are sent statistic n
270. ter OxT7f T1 Channels Full 66 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Example Z4 DLT1 Dual LAN Ports with Echo Cancellation Scenario e with 2 LAN ports and 2 Serial ports both serial ports are configured to use LAN1 serial port set to TYPE T1 no Compression e with Echo Cancellation SNMP is turned off autonegotiation is turned on e Telnet is turned on BroadcastRCV is turned on for both LAN ports the serial ports are set to T1Framed to coincide with the T1 circuits or CSU DSU s that are connected to these ports e of Service is set to it s highest priority 8 e Buffers are set to 20 packets and Frames Per Packet are set to 56 on both serial ports see the Appendix for the timing this configuration derives Master clocking is set to network so the unit will derive it s timing from the T1 the T1 s parameters are configured to match the incoming Full T1 s Master Unit config Host Contact TestUnit Host Location TestLab IP Default 192 168 1 1 Telnet On UserTimeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 50 24 This IP address is the factory default You will need to enter your IP address IP Default 192 168 1 1 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 1 51 IP Default 000 000 000 000 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 67 Ch
271. ters e Making 10 100BaseT Ethernet and RS 530 RS232 or V 35 cabling connections Configuring the IP Tube serial interface parameters Making Ethernet connections e Verifying the IP Tube connection System and Ethernet Parameters The IPTube s System parameters and LAN interface configuration items are described in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface for specific syntax requirements This portion of the manual is dedicated to the installation parameters associated with the RS530 RS232 and V 35 interfaces Serial Interface Parameters RS 530 RS232 X 21 and V 35 interface commands are configured by first selecting the Serial Inter face 51 Example INT S1 The IP Tube RS 530 RS232 and the X 21 interfaces can be configured as a Data Communication Equipment DCE or a Data Communication Terminal interface The V 35 interface must be ordered as a DCE or a DTE TYPE RS530 RS232 V 35 RS232 The TYPE parameter is factory configured to match the Serial port s hardware X 21 is supported us ing an RS530 to X 21 cable Note When Tube RemoteLoop is on DCD becomes inactive 171 Engage Communication User s Guide MODE SYNCHRONOUS ASYNCHRONOUS Protocol HDLCOIP The DCE synchronous interface supplies both the Transmit Clock SCT and Receiv SCR Normal SCT Normal DCEDTEMode DCE Protocol HDLCOIP The DCE synchronous interface supplies both the Transmit Clock SCT and Receive Clock SCR to the co
272. the time qualifica tion sample period before the Primary fails over to Secondary operation Value is in milliseconds and must be in 10ms increments Valid value range 10 to 65530 10ms to 65 530s A sample period of 10ms will create the least Time To Failover Time to Failover Tube ComfirmRemoteAlive Timeout 3 AutoProtect Signaling Port Settings The AutoProtect signaling port is performed on the S3 interface These settings must be set in the serial port used for signaling between the Primary and Secondary units DCEDTEMODE DCE DTE If the IP Tube is to be configured as a Primary unit DCEDTEMode must be set for DCE If the IP Tube is to be configured as Secondary unit DCEDTEMode must be set for DTE These settings must be correct for proper operation of the AutoProtect feature There are two Y cables used to connect to the Primary and Secondary units Connect one Y cable us ing the DB60 connector to the Primary units S3 S4 port Then connect the second Y cable using the DB60 to the Secondary units 53 54 port Next connect both Y cables using a Female to Female Gen der Changer connecting the Y cable ends of DB25 1 of the Primary to the DB25 1 of the Secondary This will connect the Primary and Secondary AutoProtect signal to each other NOTE The Y cables referenced in this section are cables used to access ports S3 and S4 on the IP Tube SER product These cables are used for signaling only 186 Chapter 8 IPPTube
273. thernet General Cause Network Cabling is faulty Solution Verify cabling is good by swapping IP Tube cabling with a known good connection Check the status LEDs on the 10 100BaseT switch to confirm a good connection If necessary create a stand alone LAN with just the workstation and the IP Tube High Ethernet Error Count Cause Bad cabling or building wiring Solution Check all cabling Swap to known good port on 10 100BaseT hub to troubleshoot testing with large Ping Packets to ascertain quality of Ethernet Connection To eliminate issues with building wiring connect the IP Tube with a known good Ethernet cable in the same room as the Ethernet hub Cause Can not connect to a hub at 100 Mbps with autonegotiate turned on Connection drops to 10 Mbps at half duplex Solution For Models GT1 GE1 only change LAN1 interface to match the hub configuration Can t Communicate Telnet with IPeTube TCP IP 201 Cause IP address is not set properly on the IP Tube Solution The Console Port which requires an RJ45 to DB9 adapter provides direct access to the configuration of the IP Tube Note The RJ45 Cable that connects to the Console Port must have 8 connections pinned 1 to 1 Typical Ethernet cables are only 4 wires The Console port utilizes the Command Line Interface detailed in Chapter 5 Command Line Interface and the Appendices Interface E1 s IP Address must be in the subnet of the computer that is attempting to access i
274. to On IP Address 192 168 1 52 24 IP Default 000 000 000 000 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol ADP Protocol adp delay 5 Protocol adp limit 2 Protocol adp count 1 Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3175 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 Interface S2 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7F T1 Channels Full Type T1 71 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Protocol ADP Protocol adp delay 5 Protocol adp limit 2 Protocol adp count 1 Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing T1Framed Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 2 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 08 Tube Buffers 20 Tube FPP 56 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression On Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube 1 Ethernet Address 000000000000 T1 Data Normal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU 0 T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7F T1 Channels Full Slave Unit config Host Contact EngageTube Host Location TubeLab IP Default 192 168 2 50 Telnet On User Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Autonegotiation On IP Address 192 168 2 51 24
275. to as Master timing If using this setting the other unit should be set to Slave When set to V2PLL or PLL the tube tunes its transmit clock to match the rate of the remote tube When the remote tube clocking is Internal or Network this tube should be set to V2PLL Note E1 Clocking GPS OCXO and GPSBackupOCXO is only available for the IP Tube G4 as upgradable options E1 FRAMING CRC4 FAS UNFRAMED Selects the desired E1 framing format including Unframed Note that Unframed mode is not permit 153 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide ted with Fractional E1 s E1 CODING HDB3 AMI Selects whether HDB3 or AMI Alternate Mark Inversion line coding is used E1 IDLECHARACTER 0xNN The E1 IDLECHARACTER is used with fractional E1 configuration to specify the value for the non se lected E1 channels The purpose of IDLECHARACTER is to ensure that CRC4framing s CRC is done without errors The Idle Character setting of the E1 device attached to the Tube s E1 interface needs to be matched when the IP Tube is set to transport the framing bit TUBE FRAMING E1 FRAMED and the E1 interface is Fractional and the E1 Framing is CRC4 E1 CHANNELS FULL FRACTIONAL NN XX NN Y Z MM Y 2 FULL will utilize all channels When FRACTIONAL is selected additional options are presented For fractional E1 with contiguous channels NN is the first E1 channel in use and XX is the numbe
276. total liability for any and all losses and damages arising out of any cause whatsoever whether such cause be based in contract negligence strict liability other tort or otherwise shall in no event exceed the repair price of the work to which such cause arises In no event shall Seller be liable for incidental consequential or punitive damages resulting from any such cause Seller may at its sole option either repair or replace defective goods or work and shall have no further obligations to Buyer Return of the defective items to Seller shall be at Buyer s risk and expense C Seller shall not be liable for failure to perform its obligations under the con tract if such failure results directly or indirectly from or is contributed to by any act of God or of Buyer riot fire explosion accident flood sabotage epidemics delays in transportation lack of or inability to obtain raw materials components labor fuel or supplies governmental laws regulations or orders other circumstances beyond Seller s reasonable control whether similar or dissimilar to the foregoing or labor trouble strike lockout or injunction whether or not such labor event is within the reasonable control of Seller Copyright 2000 2012 Engage Communication Inc All rights reserved This document may not in part or in entirety be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without first obtaining the e
277. ts serial ports are set to TYPE T1 73 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide capabilty SNMP is turned off autonegotiation is turned on e Telnet is turned on so the administrator can access the IP Tube unit remotely via the network BroadcastRCV is turned on for both LAN ports is turned on for all 4 serial ports serial ports are set to T1Framed to coincide with the T1 circuits or CSU DSU s that are connected to these ports Full T1 s of Service is set to it s highest priority 8 Buffers are set to 5 packets and Frames Per Packet are set to 16 on both serial ports see the appendix for the timing this configuration derives e Master clocking is set to network so the unit will derive it s timing from the T1 e the T1 s are configured to match the incoming T1 s parameters Master Unit config Host Contact TestTube Host Location TestLab IP Default 000 000 000 000 default routers set at the interface level Telnet On User Timeout Off snmp off snmp traps off Interface LAN1 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 51 24 IP Def 192 168 1 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface LAN2 Auto On IP Address 192 168 1 52 24 IP Def 192 168 1 50 Port On BroadcastRcv On Interface S1 Type T1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Fr
278. tting configures all the T1s DSO Timeslots to operate at 56 Kilobits 64K setting configures all the T1s DSO Timeslots to operate at 64 Kilobits Note only Tube Protocol SS7 or HDLCoIP would need to have the T1 Speed set to 56k and only if that is the data rate on the timeslots All other configurations need to be set to 64 Kilobit clear chan nel T1 IDLECHARACTER OxNN The T1 IDLECHARACTER is used with fractional T1 configuration to specify the value for the non selected T1 channels The purpose of the IDLECHARACTER is to ensure that ESF framing s CRC is done without errors The IdleCharacter setting of the T1 device attached to the Tube s T1 inter face needs to be matched when the IP Tube is set to transport the framing bit TUBE FRAMING T1 FRAMED and the T1 interface is a Fractional T1 and the T1 framing is ESF T1 CHANNELS FULL FRACTIONAL NN XX NN Y Z MM Y Z Indicates if T1 line usage is all channels or Fractional 148 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide FULL will utilize all channels When Fractional is selected additional options are presented For Fractional T1 with contiguous channels NN is the first T1 channel in use 1 24 and XX is the number of channels to be used In the case that a 384 Kbps fractional T1 uses channels 1 through 6 Start Channel 1 and Total Channels 6 where NN defines the Start Channel XX is the total number of channels T1 FRAC
279. tube 5 8 10 tube s1 1 tube on tube udpport 3175 tube address 192 168 1 51 tube s1 2 tube on tube udpport 3176 tube address 192 168 1 52 tube s1 3 145 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide tube on tube udpport 3277 tube address 192 168 1 53 save yes DELTUBE S1 NN Deletes the DSO group associated with Tube S1 NN from the configuration Note This command may only be used if Tube Mux is on After a save this command deletes all information that is owned by this Tube and no longer multiplexes the channels specified by this Tube This command will delete the tube specified and shift the remaining Tube groups to fill in the deleted MUX group Example If there are s1 1 51 2 51 3 and 51 4 MUX groups interface s1 deltube s1 2 sa y The will delete the 1 2 MUX group but will shift 51 3 and 51 4 so you will be left with 51 1 51 2 and 1 3 The 81 3 moves to 51 2 and 51 4 moves to 1 3 146 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide T1 Interface The following Serial Interface commands are applicable to IP Tube DL and G models T1 interface configurations TYPE The TYPE parameter is factory configured to match the Serial port s hardware and should be set to T1 TUBE FRAMING T1FRAMED TRANSPARENT MULTIFRAME Sets the framing of the T1 data which is encapsulated into IP packets T1Framed Encapsulates the framing b
280. ualified domain name string of the remote IPTUBE that is the destination of the T1 E1 Over IP packets The 1 2 specifier indicates which Tube this address should be used for A domain name cannot exceed 63 characters and DHCPClient must be turned on for the corresponding LAN interface in order for the name to be resolved Note Domain names must be specified with periods serparating hostnames domains and organiza tion label Hostnames may not contain spaces DYNAMIC DNS ON OFF This enables or disables the updating of an automatically discovered DDNS server with our IP ad dress so that if the remote IP Tube is configured with our domain name it may find us This feature requires OurDomainName to be a fully qualified domain name and the DHCPClient enabled on this LAN port in order to work Note DDNS registration retries when no Tube packets are received from the remote IPTube even though a previous registration was successful This covers the case where a DDNS server database may have cleared its entries after the IPTube had registered OurDNSServer address If DDNS is enabled or a Tube stream has a fully qualified domain name specified for its destination this address specifies the domain name server to either update or query 133 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Note To allow DHCP to specify our domain name server this parameter should be set to 0 0 0 0 Example ourdnsserver
281. ub The cabling that is used to connect the IP Tube T1 Port or E1 Port to the T1 E1 interface to be ex tended through the Tubes depends upon whether it is connecting to equipment or directly to a T1 E1 line In the case of a connection to the interface of T1 E1 Equipment a cross over cable is required Refer to the Appendices for the details of the wiring of this cable Connections to T1 lines is done with a standard T1 cable An E1 connection utilizes the RJ45 to DB15 male adapter and standard RJ45 cabling with all 8 connections Alarm Relay Contact The IP Tube DL and G models are available as an option with a mechanical alarm relay It can be used to signal when there are problems with communication over the Serial or LAN ports 170 Chapter 6 IPPeTube DLT1 DLE1 GT1 GE1 UNO G4 Configuration and Operation Chapter 7 IPe Tube RS530DL RS530HS RS232 X 21 V 35 and IP Tube SER RS530 RS232 V 35 Configura tion amp Operation This chapter provides operational theory and configuration details specific to the IP Tube RS530 RS232 and V 35 models With the synchronous serial interface connecting to an external encryptor video codec or router these models have unique requirements regarding timing and data bandwidth IP Tube Installation Steps The process of installing IP Tube RS530 RS232 or V 35 models involve the following steps Planning for IP Tube interconnect Installing the IP Tube hardware e Configuring System and Ethernet parame
282. ube Buffers and or Tube FPP If the Ethernet interface is running without errors then this might indicate the transmit clock on the IP Tube is running faster than the remote tube is clocking reception of data on its port interface Check clocking configurations one IP Tube should be Internal or Net work and the other to V2PLL Transmit Misc Unspecified transmit error not associated with a buffer Packets Out Of Sequence A packet arrived out of sequence from the LAN interface This indicates either a missing packet or a packet received out of order If these pack ets were received they are placed in proper order and not necessarily a data error If these are occurring the problem may become gross when there is heavier traffic on the network Points to problems on the interconnect network The network could be dropping or reordering packets Could try increasing Tube Buffers and or Tube FPP Last Sequence Disruption Displays the sequence number of packets received adjacent to sequence number gaps For example if the display is 5 7 that means sequence number 6 was missing Or 5 56 would indicate 50 packets were miss ing Note the sequence number is modulo 255 so a display of 255 1 would mean only the packet with sequence number 0 is missing Points to problems on the interconnect network The network could be dropping or reordering packets Could try increasing Tube Buffers and or Tube FPP
283. ube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 1 E1 port 33 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Interface S2 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3176 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Hex E1 TxUnderrunAIS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 2 E1 ports Interface S3 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Localloop Off Tube Remoteloop Off Tube Framing Transparent Tube LANPort LAN1 Tube 1 Destination 192 168 1 51 Tube 1 UDPPORT 3177 Tube 1 TOS 48 Tube Buffers 5 Tube FPP 12 Tube Duplicates 0 Tube Compression Off Tube 1 Ethernet Arp On Tube SequenceRecovery Off E1 Data Normal E1 Clocking Internal E1 Framing CRC4 E1 Coding HDB3 E1 IdleCharacter Hex E1 TxUnderrunAlS Off E1 Channels Full copy to here for 3 E1 ports Interface S4 Type E1 Protocol IPTube Tube On 34 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Co
284. ube is receiving a determination made by the local IP Tube Protector The Protector Transmit Port is the LAN on which the IP Tube is transmit ting a determination made by the remote IP Tube Protector When the Protector fails over to LAN2 there may be a small delay between the time it switches to receiving on LAN2 and the time the remote Protector actually begins transmitting on LAN2 This delay can cause a brief loss of service and can be eliminated by turning Tube Protector Hardswitch Off In that case the Protector always transmits on LAN2 making the data on the failover path constantly available to a remote Protector Enhanced Mode Protector Option Enhanced Mode optional is designed to accommodate the packet arrival delay that can occur be tween LAN1 and LAN2 packet networks Buffering is added to the faster path so that packet loss on one link is replaced with a packet from the other link without a fault Enhanced mode is specifically designed to work with the difference between Satellite and Terrestial network delays Interoperability requires recieving IPTube also be configured for Enhanced Mode since Enhanced Mode uses 16 bit sequence numbers The Secondary Queue from LAN2 provides redundancy for LAN1 packet loss or outage Buffers are synchronized with LAN1 buffer to hold up to 500 millisec onds of delay from LAN1 Considerations for Network Conditions If there are asymetrical conditions on a network there may be instances wher
285. uired for the pars ing of the commands For example show configuration can be entered as sh con The CLI is not case senstive Description of the commands uses both upper and lower case for syntax definitions and examples A full description of the command line interface follows 123 Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Categories The command set can be divided into four categories General Show e Config e Config Interface Online Help Included in the General commands is the HELP command providing information on the entire com mand set The Help command can be used in or out of the configuration modes Configuration Modes For the Config and Config Interface commands Engage employs a model approach The user enters the Config mode with the CONFIG command makes changes then SAVEs those changes END enables you to exit the config mode The Config Interface mode within the Config mode is used to set parameters for a specified inter face Once in the Configuration mode the user enters the INTERFACE command specifying the port that is to be configured All subsequent commands apply to the specified interface Example name INTERFACE S1 The command prompt indicates the mode of operation name the single indicates standard Telnet mode name indicates the IP Tube is in the Config mode name LAN 1 IP Tube is in Config Interface mode for LAN Port 1 To move up one level from Interface Config
286. ust be set to use its Phase Lock Loop to match this frequency Note the remote IP Tube is across a WAN whose IP address range is 192 168 2 x The WAN router address is 192 168 1 4 This is the address for the Default Router Command Line Listing Host Name IP Tube T1 Compression Master Clock IP Default router 192 168 1 4 Interface E1 IP Address of this IP Address 192 168 1 1 24 Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Reception Control BroadcastRCV ON Interface S1 Type T1 Tube Parameters Protocol IPTube Tube On Tube Framing Transparent IP Address of remote IP Tube Tube Address 192 168 2 1 Tube TOS 0x08 Tube Buffers 10 Note Echo Cancellation Required Tube FPP 56 Tube Compression ON Tube Destination Ethernet Address Resolution Tube Ethernet ARP ON Tube Ethernet Address 1 Parameters 118 Chapter 4 Configuration Examples Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Example 4 T1 Data Normal T1 Transmit timing set to Internal T1 Clocking Internal T1 LBO CSU OdB T1 Framing ESF T1 Coding B8ZS T1 IdleCharacter Ox7F T1 Channels Full Scenario IP Tube E1 Full 31 DSOs with E1 Framing Byte This sample configuration details an IP Tube E1 interconnect of a full E1 with framing bits All 31 DSOs are transported Note the IP Tube adds overhead in its conversion of E1 to IP packets so that the full E1 frame rate of 2 048 000 requires 2 250 000 bits per second of interconnec
287. values between 3 and 3 A Threshold of 3 compresses channels with Mu Law values between 7 and 7 A Threshold of 4 compresses channels with Mu Law values between 15 and 15 A Threshold of 5 compresses channels with Mu Law values between 31 and 31 A Threshold of 6 compresses channels with Mu Law values between 63 and 63 Note the maximum Mu Law values are 127 and 127 and are a nonlinear representation of the signal TUBE COMPRESSSION SILENCEDETECT CHANNELS ALL NONE NN XX NN Y Z MM Y 2 SilenceDetect Channels selects the channels for silence compression ALL selects all T1 channels for SilenceDetect lossy compression NONE selects no channels and effectively turns SilenceDetect OFF Individual channels can be selected with the form NN XX where NN is the start channel and XX is the number of channels Alternatively the form MM can select individual channels separated by com mas or the form Y Z can select a range of channels Individual channels and a range of channels can be combined on a command line 144 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide T1 E1 Multiplex Option TUBE MUX ON OFF ON enables the Tube to create DSO groups to multiplex multiple Tube streams from remote locations onto a single T1 E1 port OFF disables Tube multiplexing and only passes one stream in a point to point configuration Example interface s1 tube mux on tube mux plltu
288. with DIVIDEBY added will allow the user to take one of the above possible frequencies and divide it by this factor The DIVIDEBY factor must be an EVEN number This setting will be applied to BOTH SCR and SCT clock settings DivideBy Minimum factor is 2 e DivideBy Maximum factor is 32 To turn off the DIVIDEBY function symply do not enter the text after SCRCLOCK FACTOR value 157 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide TUBE SCTCLOCK MODE NX4M NX5M NX8M Note High Speed Models only These are additional modes available for high speed enabled Tubes NX4M selects 4 Mbps base frequency NX5M selects 5 Mbps base frequency NX8M selects 8 Mbps base frequency maximum factor allowable is 2 and the Tube SCRclock and SCTclock mode and factor values must be identical Note High speed mode requires SCR and SCT clock to be equal TUBE SCTCLOCK MODE NX2K4 NX56K NX64K The TUBE SCTCLOCKMODE setting in combination with the SCTCLOCKFACTOR controls the frequency of the RS530 V 35 DCE interface s Serial Clock Transmit TUBE SCTCLOCKFACTOR value TUBE SCTCLOCK MODE NXxxx is multiplied by SCTCLOCKFACTOR to produce the SCTCLOCK NX2K4 2 4k times factor Maximum factor is 18 Data rate from 2 4K to 43 2K e NX56K 56k times factor Maximum factor is 32 Data rate from 56K to 1792K e NX64K 64k times factor Maximum factor is 32 Data rate from 64K to 2048K TUBE INTERVAL value Note Tub
289. xpress written consent of Engage Communi cation Restricted rights legend Use duplication or disclosure by the U S government is subject to restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause in DFARS 52 227 7013 and in similar clauses in the FAR and NASA FAR Supplement Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Engage Communication Inc FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operat ed in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense NOTE Shielded Telecommunication T1 or E1 and ethernet cables must be used with the Engage IP Tube to ensure compli ance with FCC Part 15 Class A limits CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26 AWG or larger listed Telecommunication cables Equipment Malfunction If troubl
290. y between the Engage unit and the TFTP server by pinging from one to the other Firewall software on the TFTP server may need to be disabled to permit TFTP sessions initiated from the Engage Unit 5 Upgrade by issuing the command xupgrade tftp server addr upgrade filename a Example xupgrade 192 168 1 1 IPTubeGX1 BigGlue Rev3 xsvf 6 Note that when the xupgrade is complete the Engage unit will reboot causing a Telnet connection to drop If this does occur simply re establish the Telnet connection Engage Communication Inc Xupgrade Procedure page 1 of 1 Table 16 Engage CPLD Upgrade Instructions 225 Appendices IP Tube User s Guide Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Copyright Notices The Engage Communications Inc SSH incorporates components of OpenSSH and OpenSSL soft ware Here are the necessary copyright notices OpenSSH Copyright notices This file is part of the OpenSSH software The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows First we will summarize and say that all components are under a BSD licence or a licence more free than that OpenSSH contains no GPL code 1 Copyright c 1995 Tatu Ylonen lt ylo cs hut fi gt Espoo Finland All rights reserved As far as am concerned the code have written for this software can be used freely for any purpose Any derived versions of this software must be clearly marked as such and if the derived work is
291. y the new interface Example name s1 t INTERFACE LAN1 131 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Engage Communication IP Tube User s Guide Local Area Network Interfaces PORT OFF ON PORT enables or disables the Ethernet interface AUTONEGOTIATION ON OFF Enable or disable IEEE 802 3 Auto Negotiation on the Ethernet interface Warning If the device connected to LAN1 uses Auto Negotiation and LAN1 is configured to use full duplex without Auto Negotiation the other device may operate in half duplex mode by default and successful operation cannot be guaranteed DUPLEX HALF FULL Sets the duplex mode for the Ethernet interface This command only takes effect when Auto negotia tion is configured to OFF SPEED 10 100 Sets the line rate in Mbps for the Ethernet interface This command only takes effect when Auto Ne gotiation is configured to OFF Note Full Duplex and Speed of 10 has performance issues BROADCASTRCV OFF ON The Ethernet interface can be configured to disable the reception of Broadcast and Multicast packets The IP protocol uses broadcast packets to resolve the Ethernet MAC Address of the destination IP BROADCASTRCV OFF requires that the destination IP Tube or the Default Router and any local de vice that wants to communicate with the IP Tube needs to be configured with the MAC address of the IP Tube in its ARP table Due to the complexity involved in setting up the IP Address to Etherne
292. yte along with the DSO data Using a Loopback plug with T1Framed is not a valid test configuration Transparent Only the data the selected DSO s is transported in the IP Tube The T1 framing byte is not encapsu lated Note The selection of the T1 E1 DSO s starting channel and number of channels is setup by the Se rial Interface s T1 E1 configuration commands A DSO is a 64 Kbps Voice Data circuit Multiframe The T1 frames are packetized in Multiframes A T1 Multiframe is 24 T1 frames with the ABCD sig naling bits aligned Multiframed is required with Echo Cancellation in order not to alter the ABCD signaling bits only if the Phone system are using Robbed Bit Signaling For example E amp M or Chan nel Bank circuits would require Tube Framing Multiframe and T1 Signaling Robbedbit for use with Echo Cancelation PRI and signaling that uses an individual DSO Timeslot such as number 24 is not Robbed Bit Signaling T1 DATA NORMAL INVERTED Can be set for Normal or Inverted and must match the setting of the DSU CSU on the other end T1 TXUNDERRUNAIS ON OFF ON Enable the transmission of an unframed All Ones BLUE Alarm Code out the T1 interface if the T1 transmitter underruns This is only required when Tube Framing is set to transparent and the Telco equipment does not identify a framed All Ones as a BLUE Alarm Note Transmit Underruns occur when the IP packets flow is interrupted or stopped OFF disables generation of an AIS No

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

( ~ 商加取扱説明書  Samsung HT-TP33 manual de utilizador  Gainward 426018336-2876 NVIDIA GeForce GTX 650 Ti 2GB graphics card    Phantom- Metall  09T602-0126-B1 Sélection: Cylindre, culasse  Manual do Usuário  Delta 41319-PN Installation Guide  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file